JP7308514B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines are provided with production devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), speakers, etc., and various productions are executed according to the progress of a game. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect that is different from the normal effect that accompanies the progress of the game, every time a predetermined time is measured. By arranging a plurality of game machines with such functions on an island facility in a game hall, a special effect by a plurality of game machines can be executed all at once in a predetermined cycle (for example, see Patent Document 1). reference).

JP 2014-180295 A

However, the function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals has already been widely known, and simply providing such a function is insufficient to improve the enjoyment of the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve amusement in a game machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

In order to solve the aforementioned problems, the present invention employs the following configurations.

The game machine of means 1 is
identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming a specific display result;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined cycle;
a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result;
input means for input by the player;
a reception period generation means for generating a reception period for receiving input by the input means before starting execution of the special effect,
It is possible to select execution or non-execution of the special effect based on the input by the input means during the reception period,
As the suggestive effect, a specific suggestive effect that can be executed during the execution period of the special effect is provided,
When non-execution of the special effect is selected based on the input by the input means during the reception period, the execution of the special effect and the specific suggestion effect is stopped , and the special effect to be executed in the next cycle The gist is that information is displayed on a predetermined display unit .

According to the present invention as described above, it is possible to improve the amusement of a game machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between types of winnings and opening patterns of the big winning openings. It is the table|surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a ready-to-win determination table, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. A pattern selection table. It is a table|surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of the process at the time of start ball entry. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of special design 1 decision processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during special symbol 2 fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flow chart of special design 2 decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of special figure operation status setting processing 1. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flow chart of a special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flow chart of the number of pending ball processing. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 4 is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 2 ms timer interrupt processing; 10 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing; It is a flow chart of the fluctuation effect start processing. FIG. 11 is a block showing the configuration of a sub-control board of Example 2; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing of the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart of special effect-related processing of Example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of a special effect (RTC effect) of Example 2, (a) is an explanatory view showing an example of a display screen on which a preceding effect is performed, and (b) is a display screen on which a main effect is performed; It is an explanatory view showing an example. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen when a special effect (RTC effect) is executed during the special game state of Example 2; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen on which a normal first notice effect is performed according to Example 2; FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display screen on which a special first notice effect of Example 2 is performed; FIG. 11 is a first notice effect determination table of Example 2; FIG. 13 is a flowchart of special effect-related processing of Example 3; 14 is a flowchart of 10 ms timer interrupt processing of Example 4; 14 is a flowchart of special effect stop selection processing of Example 4. FIG.

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following description, when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed following the end of the variable display of the symbols, a pachinko machine capable of executing a winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profits (for example, prize balls) to the player will be described. , an example to which the present invention is applied.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is a game machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56 , 56 . In addition, the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side in the vertical direction (the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

In addition, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotational angle) of the player, and can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the shooting device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. Further, on the front frame 51, there are provided a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b which can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect which is executed as the game progresses. (These two effect buttons are collectively referred to simply as "effect button 63" or "input means"). A plurality of production buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game production. Incidentally, the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment 1, as long as it can detect the input from the player, or input detection means (for example, , appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are positioned in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the display screens 71a and 72a can be easily viewed by the player. and is slanted in the outward direction. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 described later, can display images according to the execution/non-execution of a game, the state of the game, the performance of the game to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information on games (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability and explanation of game production, etc.) , information (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) relating to the settings of the gaming machine is displayed. Among these information, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or the same information. Further, when the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display different information among these information, the same information is displayed. There are cases where Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. may be displayed. Any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

The image display device 7 is provided inside the game area 3 formed on the game board 2 , and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided outside the game area 3 . ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-opening side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It is Therefore, it is possible to rotate in the horizontal direction around the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 as axes. More specifically, from the state (normal state) shown in FIG. 1, it is configured to be rotatable to the right by a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees). This is because when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to project forward of the front frame 51 is used for pachinko. This is a configuration for preventing damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball dispenser, inter-stand equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side of the game machine 1 (on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1). . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixed to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. Also, the game board 2 is provided with board surface lamps 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are projected. In addition, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3 . The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2 . A display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a production pattern display area 7b (also called a production pattern display section) in which production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as "production patterns") are displayed side by side. ) is provided, and the production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are the game state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state) according to the game state A variable display is performed in synchronism with the variable display of a special symbol (a first special symbol or a second special symbol to be described later) set as the subject of the game. The production pattern 8L is also called "left pattern", the production pattern 8C is also called "middle pattern", and the production pattern 8R is also called "right pattern".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). Although details will be described later, in this low-probability-low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first game state). Along with this, the special symbol success/failure determination probability (first special symbol success/failure determination and second special symbol success/failure determination) is low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the variation time of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. is set longer (twice or more) than the fluctuation time of (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball is shot to the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the starting port (second starting port 21 or third starting port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball into the left game area 3A (first game area) and enter the first start hole 20 to variably display the first special symbol rather than to let the game ball enter. It is That is, in the normal state, it can be said that it is a game state in which the first special symbol (effect symbol) is the main subject and is variably displayed. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the performance symbol display area 7b are synchronously displayed with the first special symbols and are displayed in a variable manner and stopped.

Each of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R consists of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. A first special symbol display device 41a ("first The result of the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit ”), and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display unit 41b (also referred to as the “second special symbol display unit”) The results of symbol variation display (results of special symbol propriety determination) are displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize them. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special design, the second special design, and the performance design may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the special symbol propriety determination is also simply referred to as "property determination" or "first propriety determination". In addition, the control section (main control section 80) that executes the special symbol validity determination is also referred to as "validity determination execution means" or "first validity determination execution means".

For example, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the production pattern is stopped with the same three-digit pattern (double eyes) such as "777" (also called "big hit pattern"). indicate. In addition, in the event of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance pattern such as ``135'' or a special pattern for a small hit such as ``3*3'' (also referred to as a ``small hit pattern'') will be used. Stop displaying the pattern. In addition, when a small hit is achieved, the pattern of the small hit pattern and the winning pattern may be stopped and displayed in the same manner, instead of the mode of stopping and displaying the small hit dedicated pattern. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit patterns (first small hit pattern, second small hit pattern, etc.) can be distinguished. ) may be stop-displayed, or the same (common) small winning pattern may be stop-displayed so as to make it difficult to distinguish between them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is lost, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed with a different symbol. ”). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of special symbol suitability determination) by looking at the stop-displayed effect symbols. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance pattern 8 displayed in the pattern display area 7b is seen and grasped. In addition, as the execution mode of the variable display of the production pattern, for example, a mode of scrolling up and down, left and right, oblique direction, etc., a mode of performing display using only the first production design display part 7b, and a mode of displaying the production using only the first production design display part In addition to 7b, one or both of the second effect symbol display portion 71a (display screen 71a) and the third effect symbol display portion 72a (display screen 72a) are used for effect display. Moreover, in addition to this, it is also possible to have a mode in which an effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display portion 71a or the third effect symbol display portion 72a.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game production using the above-mentioned production patterns (production pattern game production), it is executed along with the winning game (big win game, small winning game). A winning game effect (a big winning game effect, a small winning game effect), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like are displayed. In addition, in the performance pattern game performance, the winning game performance, and the demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. In addition, although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is shot to the left game area 3A and a game is played, or a game ball is shot to the right game area 3B Depending on whether or not a game is being played, the display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously), and such a type of game Machines are also called "simultaneous variators (parallel variators)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect pending display area 9c (first effect pending display section) for displaying the first effect pending 9a according to the number of stored first special figure pending described later, There is a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display portion) for displaying the second effect pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figure pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect suspension 9a or the second effect suspension 9b in the effect suspension display area, the first special figure suspension displayed on the first special figure suspension display 43a (see FIG. 4) described later The number of memories and the number of memories of the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect pending display portion and the display position of the second effect pending display portion may change depending on the game state, game mode, or game effect to be executed (ready effect, etc.). Also, only one of the first effect pending display portion and the second effect pending display portion (for example, only the effect pending display portion corresponding to the special pattern (effect pattern) that is the main subject depending on the game state) is displayed. can be

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the performance symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later. Furthermore, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13, which has an electric decorative member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED and can be turned on according to the game state, is arranged in the shape of letters, figures, or the like. there is

A movable decorative member 14 is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 so as to be movable along with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. ), the movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. This enhances the player's interest in the game and heightens the expectation of winning.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination related to the first special symbol ( First special symbol right/wrong determination, first right/wrong determination) are executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the right/wrong determination.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3, there is a gate 28 (a normal figure start opening, a passage opening, a ball entry opening, a specific start (also called mouth) is provided. A game ball entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. This gate 28 also serves as a starting gate 29 (also referred to as a winning combination gate or an operating gate) for starting a big win game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and also the starting gate 29 . When a game ball enters (passes through) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for judging whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, normal Along with executing the symbol suitability determination (also referred to as "general design suitability determination" or "third suitability determination"), the normal design starts to display fluctuations, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal design is based on the result of the normal design suitability determination. Stop display. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opening operation) to open the second starting port 21 . In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol validity determination whether the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 or not as the "validity determination execution means" It is also referred to as a "third propriety determination executing means". This gate sensor 28a also serves as a starting gate sensor 29a for starting a big win game. That is, the sensor that detects the ball entering the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

In addition, although the details will be described later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed through, the function of the start gate 29 is exhibited only when the conditions for executing the big win game are satisfied ("big win It is also called "executable state" or "jackpot waiting state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) while the condition (big win standby state) is not established, the control processing relating to the normal pattern is performed, and the big win start processing is not executed. In addition, when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), if the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28), the jackpot game in waiting starts, and the predetermined jackpot ( A round game is started in which the first big winning hole 30 is in an open state (a state where a ball can be entered).

In the game area 3 on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first big prize opening 30 is provided. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member 32 , and opens and closes the first big prize opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-like) game ball passage on the upper surface. It is passable. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first big winning hole 30 passes through the top surface of the opening/closing member 32 without entering the first big winning hole 30. and flows downstream in the game area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3, thereby forming a game ball passage on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32. disappears. As a result, when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first big winning hole 30 enters the first big winning hole 30 . In this way, the opening/closing member 32 for opening/closing the entrance of the first big prize hole 30 is a retractable opening/closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down can be smoothly moved to the first big prize winning opening. In addition to letting the ball enter the winning opening 30, it is possible to guide the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (at the time of closing) in an arbitrary direction (second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. In addition, the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first big winning device 31 (first variable ball entrance) is configured to open and close the opening/closing member 32 so that a game ball cannot enter a ball entering state (closed state) and a game ball entering a ball entering state (closed state). It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the right area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the first big winning opening 30, the ease of entry of the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third start port 26, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination related to the second special symbol ( Second special symbol right/wrong determination, second right/wrong determination) are executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and after the lapse of a predetermined time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of right/wrong determination. In addition, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 (upper stage, lower stage), the upper game ball path in which the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower game ball passage in which a second prize winning port 35 is provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage comes into contact with the game nail 16 provided near the third starting hole 26 and enters the third starting hole 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. - 特許庁In addition, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed type winning device (ball entrance) that can always enter a ball, it becomes a big hit in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big-hit game is hit to the right. When executed in a game, it is possible to enter (hold) a game ball into the third starting port 26 during the big win game, and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the big win game ends.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, there is a variable A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as "variable starter" or "variable starter") having a second starter 21 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation start condition) is established, the suitability determination of the first special symbol (the 1 special symbol propriety determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the propriety determination.

The variable prize winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening/closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 . By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and makes it impossible for a game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. there is In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

In addition, the movable member 23, like the opening and closing member 32, has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) upper surface as a game ball passage. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. - 特許庁Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 thus removed disappears from the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 . As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21 . In this way, the movable member 23 for opening and closing the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are removed. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and when the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is moved in an arbitrary direction (second big winning port 35 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. lead to

In this way, in the state where the game ball is shot to the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol propriety determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variably displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Therefore, in the state (right-handed game) in which the game is played by shooting the game ball in the right side area (right game area 3B), the game state (state B: low probability high base state, high-probability-high base state), and a game state (state C: high-probability-low base state) in which the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in the right area (right game area 3B) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, in the game area below (downstream) of the second start opening 21, a second big winning opening 35 is provided. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 has an opening/closing member 37 which opens and closes the second big prize opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37 . Like the opening/closing member 32, the opening/closing member 37 has a game ball passage with a substantially rectangular (long plate-like) top surface. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37 . Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. and flows downstream in the game area.

In addition, the opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening/closing member 37 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opened/closed member 37 disappears from the entrance portion of the second prize winning port 35 . As a result, when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second big winning hole 35 enters the second big winning hole 35 . In this way, the opening/closing member 37 for opening/closing the entrance of the second big winning hole 35 is a retractable opening/closing member similar to the opening/closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when it is open), the game ball that has flowed down. is smoothly entered into the second big winning hole 35, and when the closed state (when closed), the game balls flowing down are guided in an arbitrary direction (out hole 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. becomes possible. In addition, the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big winning device 36 (second variable ball entrance) operates by opening and closing the opening/closing member 37 so that a game ball cannot enter a non-enterable state (closed state) and a game ball can enter a non-enterable state (closed state). It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In addition, a plurality of (three) general ball entrances 27 are provided in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 . In this way, the game areas 3 where various ball entrances and the like are arranged are the left game area (first game area) 3A and the right game area (second game area) 3B from the center in the horizontal direction. , can be divided into A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, in the normal state (low-probability-low base state, state A) at the start of the game, the player aims to enter the first start hole 20 by striking left. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game centered on entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed hitting (first special symbol propriety determination).

On the other hand, when it becomes a big hit in the success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) based on the ball entered into the first starting port 20, the big hit game and the big hit game (special game) after the end (low probability high base state, high probability High base state or high probability low base state) is to enter the gate 28, the first large winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second large winning opening 35 by hitting to the right. It becomes a game aiming at the ball. Concretely, when a big hit is achieved in a left-handed game, first, a big-hit waiting state is entered, and a right-handed game aiming at entering the gate 28 is performed. Next, when the ball is entered into the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big win waiting state, the big win game starts and becomes a right-handed game mainly aimed at entering the first big winning hole 30.例文帳に追加

Also, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a low-probability-high base state or a high-probability-high base state (state B), mainly to the gate 28 (normal figure gate) and the second start port 21 It will be a right-handed game that aims to enter the ball. On the other hand, when the jackpot game ends and the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-probability-low base state (state C), a right-handed game aiming at entering the third start port 26 and the second big prize winning port 35. Become. That is, the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state (state B) are a right-handed game centered on entering the second start port 21 (first special symbol propriety determination) by right-handed hitting, and high probability The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game centered on entering a ball into the third starting port 26 (second special symbol propriety determination) by right-handed hitting. As a result, even in the same right-handed game, depending on the game state (state B or state C), the main starting port (target of special symbol propriety determination) will be different.

In addition, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided upstream of the gate 28, and a game ball flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 of the right game area 3B is discharged. The amount is adjustable (decreasable). That is, the second out port 34b is installed on the upstream side of all the ball entrances installed in the right gaming area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b are used for these ball entrances. It is possible to adjust the ball entry rate (approach rate) of the game ball to the installation area. Furthermore, in the right game area 3B (second game area), downstream of the second starting opening 21 and upstream of the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for a small hit, a third out opening 34c is provided. By this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of the game ball into the game area on the side of the second large winning prize port 35 when the small winning occurs, that is, the rate of entering the second large winning prize port 35 during the small winning game is determined. It is adjustable. A game peg provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c makes it possible to adjust the rate of entry of game balls into the second big winning port 35 (progress rate).

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, the second big winning hole 35, and the general ball entering hole 27, each ball entering hole , a predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as “prize balls” or “gaming profits”) are paid out (given). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the first big winning hole 30 (amount of game profit) is the number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the second big winning hole 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big prize winning port 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big prize winning port 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. prize balls shall be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The main display device 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variably displaying and statically displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display for variably displaying and statically displaying the second special symbol. A device 41b (second special symbol display portion) and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably display and stop display normal symbols (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. In addition, on the main display 40, the first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of storage of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol (second 2 special figure suspension) 2nd special figure suspension display 43b that displays the number of memories, and the normal figure suspension display 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation suspension (normal figure suspension) of the normal design display 42 ing.

In addition, on the main display 40, a win indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination has been hit, the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, right A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the ball should be shot left or right. In addition, the main display 40 includes a variation state indicator 49 that indicates the variation state of the first special symbol (c1), the variation state of the second special symbol (c2) and the variation state of the normal symbol (c3). there is Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 . The variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. - 特許庁In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols. Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. FIG. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, after the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, it is stopped and displayed, and the first start port 20 and the second start port are displayed by the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed (derived display). 21 or the result of the success/failure determination (special symbol success/failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol propriety determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern), the opening pattern according to the type of the specific special pattern stopped and displayed, A special game (big win game, small win game) for opening the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 and/or the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is the 15R first big hit, the three LEDs of "ijn" are lit and the rest are extinguished. Also, when the 4R second big hit is achieved, four LEDs of "jnkl" are lit and the rest are extinguished. Moreover, when it becomes out, two LED of "lo" can be turned on, and the rest can be turned off. Also, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. As for the stop display mode, similar to the first special symbol display 41b, different display modes are determined according to the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination (big hit, small hit, or miss). In addition, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed (before derived display), the special symbols are variably displayed over a predetermined variable time. It is possible to adopt a mode in which each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows through.

Thus, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 41a A plurality of LEDs corresponding to is lit (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a jackpot type (one type if one type ), a small hit type (one type if one type), and a losing type (one type if one type).

In addition, the fluctuation state indicator 49 includes a display portion c1 (LEDc1), a display portion c2 (LEDc2) and a display portion c3 (LEDc3). The variation state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the variation state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display portion c3. Concretely, the indicator c1 which shows the fluctuation state of the 1st special design, consists of one LED (display section) which is the number of LEDs (display section, indicator) which is smaller than that of the 1st special design indicator 41a. It is Then, during the variable display of the first special symbol, it blinks and displays, and when the variable time of the first special symbol passes, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination. Concretely, in the case of a loss, the light is turned off and the display is stopped, and in the case of a big hit, the red light is displayed and the stop display is made regardless of the type of the big win. Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c1 blinks during the variable display of the first special symbol, yellow lighting display while the variable display is interrupted, red lighting display while the big hit symbol is stopped, and red lighting display while the winning symbol is stopped. is turned off (hidden). As a result, by looking at the display portion c1 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the first special symbol (during variation, during interruption, during stop, result of right/wrong determination). In addition, since the fluctuation state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is smaller) than the first special symbol indicator 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the fluctuation state can be easily grasped. In addition, the fluctuation state indicator 49 (display section c1) functions as the second first special symbol indicator 41a. In addition, "suspension of variable display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) that is executed at the same time is a big hit, and temporarily suspends the variable display. Then, after the cancellation condition is met, the variable display is resumed.

In addition, the display portion c2 showing the variation state of the second special symbol is, like the display portion c1, one LED (display portion, display) which is a smaller number than the second special symbol display device 41b. display). Then, during the variable display of the second special symbol, it blinks and displays, and when the second special symbol variable time elapses, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the result of the second special symbol propriety determination. Specifically, in the case of a loss, the light is turned off and the display is stopped, in the case of a big hit, the display is all lit in red regardless of the type of the big hit, and in the case of a small hit, the display is all lit in green regardless of the type of the small hit (small hit mode). Stop with . Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c2 blinks during the variable display of the second special symbol, yellow lighting display during suspension of the variable display, red lighting display while the big win symbol is stopped, and stop of the small winning symbol. It is lit in green during the middle, and is turned off (not displayed) while the off pattern is stopped. As a result, by looking at the display portion c2 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the second special symbol (during variation, during interruption, during stop, result of right/wrong determination). In addition, since the fluctuation state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is smaller) than the second special symbol indicator 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the fluctuation state can be easily grasped. In addition, the fluctuation state indicator 49 (display section c2) functions as the second second special symbol indicator 41b.

In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display portion c1 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as "first state symbol" or "first sub-symbol". Also, since the result of the first special symbol suitability determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display portion c1, it is also referred to as "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as "confirmation symbol")". Moreover, the display mode (design) displayed on the display part c2 is also called "second state design" or "second sub-design". Also, since the result of the second special symbol suitability determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display portion c2, it is also referred to as a "second confirmation symbol (simply referred to as a "confirmation symbol")". In addition, the first state symbol is displayed in a variable display and a stopped display corresponding to the variable display and the stopped display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variable display and the stopped display in the second special symbol. Display fluctuating and stop display. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the first state symbol is stopped and displayed in the off state (loss mode), and in the case of a big hit, all red lights regardless of the big win type (big win mode). Stop with . The same applies to the relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol.

In addition, the display portion c3 showing the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is, like the display portion c1, a single LED (display portion) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display portion, display device) than the normal symbol display device 42. It is configured. During the variable display of the normal symbols, blinking display is performed, and when the variable time of the normal symbols has elapsed, the display is stopped in a display mode according to the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbols are appropriate. Specifically, in the case of a loss, the light is turned off and the stop display is performed, and in the case of a hit, the red light is displayed and the stop display is performed regardless of the type of hit. In addition, when the variable display of normal symbols is interrupted (pause), it is stopped and displayed with yellow lighting.

Therefore, the display part c3 blinks during the variable display of the normal symbols, turns yellow during the interruption of the variable display, turns red while the winning symbols are stopped, and turns off when the winning symbols are stopped. (hidden). As a result, by looking at the display portion c3 of the variable state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variable state of the normal symbols (during variation, during suspension, during stop, result of right/wrong determination). In addition, since the fluctuation state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is smaller) than the normal symbol indicator 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type in detail, but the fluctuation state can be easily determined. It is possible to grasp the

In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display portion c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as "first state normal symbol" or "first secondary normal symbol". In addition, the first state normal symbols are variably displayed and stopped in correspondence with the variably displayed and stopped displays of the normal symbols. Therefore, when the result of the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is lost, it is stopped and displayed in extinguished state (missing mode), and in the case of winning, it is stopped and displayed in red lighting (hitting mode) regardless of the type of winning.

In this embodiment, a special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) and a fluctuation state display device 49 are provided so that the fluctuation state of the special symbols can be grasped by any of them. , When any of the special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 41a, second special symbol indicator 41b) having a large number of LEDs capable of grasping the fluctuation state in detail fails (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to roughly grasp the fluctuation state. Also, the normal symbol display 42 and the fluctuation state display 49 are the same. In addition, in this embodiment, both the special symbol indicators (the first special symbol indicator 41a and the second special symbol indicator 41b) and the fluctuation state indicator 49 are controlled by the main controller.

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of the variable display) of the special symbols and the performance symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a hit (big hit or small win) is called a "hit mode." ", "specific mode", "specific display mode" or "specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out is the "loss mode" or "non-specific mode". , also referred to as "non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit is also referred to as a "jackpot mode" or the "jackpot symbol", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a small hit. This is also called "small hit mode" or "small hit pattern". Furthermore, the image display device, the first special symbol display device 41a (first special symbol display section), the second special symbol display device 41b (second special symbol display section) and any one or all of the special symbol display section 41 Also referred to as "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In this pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26, various random numbers for judging whether or not a special symbol is accepted are determined based on the ball entered. Information (also referred to as "acquired information") is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if it is information acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special figure reservation is stored as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information") If it is information stored in the unit 85a and acquired based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as a second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information") be done. An upper limit is set to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the special figure reservation means to determine the special symbol suitability determination random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol for showing the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26, the special symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or during the execution of the special game based on any special symbol propriety determination, the special symbol propriety judgment for the entering ball is performed with a predetermined number (each 4 pieces) as the upper limit. It is possible to reserve (reserve) the rights of

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as "u□v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is extinguished, such as "u●v□". In addition, when the number of reservations is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green, such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure pending display device 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LED according to the number of the second special figure pending, the second special figure pending It displays numbers. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed based on passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the result of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 is displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game ("specific game") to open the second start port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. ) is performed. In addition, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also called auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination according to the lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the winning normal symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ■: lighting, □: lighting off). In addition, when the determination result is out, a non-normal symbol in which only the LED of t is lit is displayed, such as "s□t■". Before the normal symbols are stop-displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed for a predetermined variable time. The mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately repeat turning on and off.

When a game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various types of information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as random numbers for judging normal symbol suitability based on the passage of the game ball, and acquires various types of information. is temporarily stored as a normal pattern reservation in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80 . An upper limit is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of its passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of normal symbols or during the execution of the auxiliary game , can reserve (hold) the right of the normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of this normal map reservation is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 . Concretely, the normal map reservation indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal diagram reservations. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (“main control unit”, “main control unit”, “main control unit”, “main control unit”, etc.) that performs control related to game profits such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, and game state transition. Also referred to as "game control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit" or "production control unit") that performs control related to the performance to be executed with the progress of the game, game ball A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) that performs control related to payout, a production pattern 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a pattern displayed on the production display device 102, a third production reservation display device 103a, and an image control board 100 (image control unit) for controlling the display of the fourth effect holding display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided at substantially the center of the rear side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above this main control board case, An audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and an image control board storage case containing the image control board 100 are provided. is provided. A payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing a power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure suspension storage unit 85 (first special figure suspension storage unit 85a and second special figure suspension storage unit 85b) and normal figure suspension storage unit 86. .

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a third starting opening sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a), a first prize winning opening sensor 30a, a second A special winning opening sensor 35a and a general ball entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also called "detection means".

The first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The third starting hole sensor 26a is provided in the third starting hole 26 and detects a game ball entering the third starting hole 26. As shown in FIG. The gate sensor 28a (starting gate sensor 29a) is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28 . The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The general ball entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 and detects a game ball entering the general ball entrance 27 .

As solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33, and the second big winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 . The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31 . The second big winning opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36 . Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a normal symbol display. A drawing hold indicator 44, a variation status indicator 49, a round indicator 45, a game status indicator 46, a shooting direction indicator 47, and a win indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control section 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls or rental balls, and a card unit 135, and a launching device 112 through a launching control board 111 (also referred to as a "shooting control unit"). is connected. Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end of the pachinko machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper surface of FIG. 1), and a prepaid card (game card) inserted by the player performing a predetermined ball lending operation. It enables ball lending based on information stored in a value storage medium, etc.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 operates the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 through the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 changes to the shooting handle 60. Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The production control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling game production as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. there is The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90 . The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90, based on the command received from the main control board 80, to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 , the display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect suspension display device 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display device 103b let it take control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device, specifically characters, items, graphics, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The performance display device 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED performs variable display of the second special symbol. And display mode that shows the display result of the first special design or the second special design (result of special design propriety determination) by performing variable display and stop display according to the stop display, and lighting / extinguishing of the corresponding LED, or color Stop with . Similarly, the third effect suspension display 103a and the fourth effect suspension display 103b are each composed of two LEDs. And, by lighting and extinguishing of two LEDs, or a combination of colors, the third effect pending display 103a is displayed by the pending number displayed in the first effect pending display area 9c and the first special figure pending display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number. In addition, the fourth effect pending display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number displayed in the second effect pending display area 9d and the second special figure pending display 43b. be.

The character pattern is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion). part), part or all of the production pattern 8, the first production suspension display part 9c, or the second production suspension display part 9d may become invisible. be. Even when such a covered state is reached, the effect display device 102, the third effect reservation display device 103a, the third effect reservation display device 103a, And the 4th production|presentation suspension display 103b is provided. In addition, the display modes of the effect display device 102, the third effect suspension display device 103a, and the fourth effect suspension display device 103b are such that they can always be visually recognized without being hindered by the movement of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. It's becoming A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the one-chip microcomputer 101 for image control of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU of the image control board 100 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 . In addition, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the production control microcomputer 91 provides light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5. , lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80 . 1, the movable decorative member 14 is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided on the center decorative body 10. As shown in FIG. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as "driving data") for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub control board 90, The movement of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined movement pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in that case, the CPU may be caused to control lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable decorative member 14 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

In addition, the sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the special symbol suitability determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol propriety determination, there are "big hit", "minor hit", and "off". At the time of "big hit", the special symbol display part 41 stops displaying the "big hit pattern". The jackpot pattern (specific display result) is predetermined according to the type of jackpot described later (see FIG. 6). Further, in the case of a "small win", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays the "small win symbol". In addition, when "missing", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays "missing symbol". When it is determined as a big win or a small win, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the stopped special symbol. . A special game executed as a big win is called a "big win game", and a special game executed as a small win is called a "small win game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and depending on the result (specification result) of the special symbol suitability determination, the type of hit corresponding to the result (specification result) is executed. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol suitability determination is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc., different hit types (jackpot , including small hits). In addition, depending on the winning type, the special game to be executed may also differ, and the game profit amount obtainable by the special game may differ, or the game state after the special game may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "15R (round) 1st big win", "4R 2nd big win", "4R 3rd big win", "4R 4th big win", "15R th big win". 5 jackpots”, “2R 6th jackpot”, and “2R 7th jackpot”. In the "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is 15 times. In addition, the "4R second big win", "4R third big win", and "4R fourth big win" have four opening times (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30). In the "2R 6th big win" and "2R 7th big win", the number of openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is two. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning hole 30 is opened and the second big winning hole 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning hole 30 is also called a "big winning big winning hole (big winning variable ball entrance)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" indicate the game state after the end of the jackpot game. , Move to the high probability state described later (activate the probability variation function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also called "probable variable jackpots (high-probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability variable function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, the "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" shift the game state after the jackpot game is over to a low probability state described later (the variable probability function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also called "low-probability jackpots (low-probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot" are "2nd special pattern time saving" which sets the fluctuation time of the 2nd special pattern to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. function" and do not activate the high base generation function. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-probability-low base state (state C). This high-probability-low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this high probability low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is compared to the low probability low base state, low probability high base state and high probability high base state, for a long time have set. In particular, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

In addition, the game characteristics of the high-probability-low base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various ball entrances are arranged, the third start The ball is entered into the mouth 26. Then, it is a period during which the second special symbol success/failure determination is performed, a small win is generated, and the number of game balls can be increased during the period between the previous big win and the next big win (between big wins). In addition, by frequently generating small wins in the high probability/low base state between big wins, it is expected that many game balls can be obtained in a short period of time due to the small wins. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and a period in which it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot" operate the "1st special symbol short-time function" and "high base generation function" after the end of the jackpot game. By the operation of the first special symbol time saving function, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (average fluctuation time) is shorter than when the first special symbol time saving function is not in operation (low probability base state, high probability low base state) set on time. In addition, since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a low probability high base state. In the case of "4R 4th big win" and "2R 7th big win", the low-probability-high base state ends when the next big win occurs or when the variable display of special symbols is executed 100 times. . When ending based on the fact that the variable display of the special symbol is executed 100 times, the game state is set to the low-probability-low base state (normal state). In addition, although it will be described later in detail, in the low probability height base state, as described above, by performing a right hitting game in the right game area 3B where various ball entrances are arranged, the first special symbol propriety determination is performed, and the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

In addition, the "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol short-time function" and "high-base generation function" after the jackpot game ends. In addition, since the second special symbol time saving function is not operated, the variation time of the second special symbol is longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-probability-high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd big win" and "2R 6th big win", the "first special symbol time saving function" and "high base generating function" continue until the next big win occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability variation function" continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", after the jackpot game ends, the high base state (first special symbol time-saving state) is set until the next jackpot occurs.

In the high-probability-high base state, similarly to the low-probability-high base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol propriety determination is performed, and the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next big hit. It is a period to perform, and the high-probability-low base state, as described above, executes the second special symbol propriety determination by the right-handed game, and by causing frequent small hits, many game balls in a short period of time due to the small hits. It is an advantageous period for the player, who can also expect to acquire. In addition, there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high-probability-low base state than the game balls that can be acquired in the high-probability-high base state.

In addition, a high-accuracy high base state after the end of the jackpot game (4R third jackpot game) related to the "4R third jackpot" and a low base state after the end of the jackpot game (4R fourth jackpot game) related to the "4R fourth jackpot" By executing a common game performance (first game performance: background, game mode, character pattern, ready-to-reach performance, etc.) in the fixed high base state and the state, it is made difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

When the type of jackpot was ``4R 3rd jackpot'', the high probability high base state continued even after 100 times of display of variation of special symbols, and it was ``4R 4th jackpot''. In that case, after 100 times of the variable display of the special symbol, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-reporting state, the player expects that the high-probability-high base state will continue even after 100 times, regardless of the state of the game, and enhances the interest in the game. In addition, in the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state, that is, in the high-base state, the player can play the game without reducing the holding ball so much (in a state where the decrease speed of the holding ball is slower than the low-probability-low base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, after the end of the jackpot game (2R sixth jackpot game) related to the "2R sixth jackpot", and after the jackpot game related to the "2R seventh jackpot" (2R seventh jackpot game) By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low and high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state it is. do. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, a variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-probability-high base state or low-probability-high base state) is not notified (recognition is difficult).

When the type of jackpot was ``2R 6th jackpot'', the high-probability/high base state continued even after 100 times of display of variation of special symbols, resulting in ``2R 7th jackpot''. In this case, after 100 times of the variable display of the special symbols, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-reporting state, the player expects that the high-probability-high base state will continue even after 100 times, regardless of the state of the game, and enhances the interest in the game.

Here, each of the big hits of "4R third big win", "4R fourth big win", "2R sixth big win" and "2R seventh big win", which are big wins in which the game state after the big win game is in state B. The symbol is also called "first specific display result", and "15R 1st big win", "4R 2nd big win" and "15R 5th big win" are big wins in which the game state after the big win game is finished is state C. Each of the jackpot symbols is also referred to as "second specific display result".

In addition, as for the small hit that can occur as a result of the second special symbol success/failure determination, the number of openings of the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is 6 times, and compared with other big hits, the number of opening times is 1 (and The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, six openings of 0.3 seconds are performed for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with big hit games (for example, 15R first big win game, 4R fourth big win game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small win game is set to be small. However, in the high-probability-low base state between big wins, by generating small wins a plurality of times (many times), a small win game can be executed a plurality of times, and more game balls can be obtained. Further, in the case of a small hit, all the second big winning openings 35 are opened and the first big winning openings 30 are not opened. For this reason, the second big winning hole 35 is also referred to as "big winning hole for small winning (variable ball entry hole for small winning)". In addition, unlike the big win (big win game), in the small win (small win game), the number of openings of the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of openings. Further, the variable probability function does not operate based on the occurrence of the small win, and if the game state at the time of the occurrence of the small win is a high probability state, the high probability state is maintained even after the small win game ends, and when the small win occurs. If the game state is a low probability state, the low probability state is maintained even after the end of the small winning game. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the judgment of the first special pattern (special drawing 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and 4R for the third jackpot. 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the big hits in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 50% for the 15R 5th big hit, 15% for the 2R 6th big hit, and 35% for the 2R 7th big hit. That is, by the operation of the later-described second special symbol time-saving function, when the big hit is made by the success judgment (second special symbol success judgment) based on the ball entering the third start port 26 with improved variation frequency, 15R A big win (15R fifth big win) is achieved, and a large amount of game balls can be obtained in a short period of time. Thus, in the pachinko game machine 1, rather than becoming a big hit in the winning judgment (first special symbol winning judgment) performed by the game ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 It is highly likely that a big hit will be advantageous to the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the success/failure determination (second special symbol success/failure determination) performed by the game ball entering the 3 start port 26. is set to be In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth big win and the occurrence of a high probability/low base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by a small win.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss is made based on a ``random number for judging the success or failure of a special symbol (also referred to as ``information for judging success or failure''). The determination of the type of the jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the type of jackpot (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" and "information for symbol determination"). In addition, it does not have a small hit in the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination. As shown in FIG. 7(A), the special symbol suitability determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 includes the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct and the random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is "fluctuation pattern random number (also called "fluctuation pattern information")". Also, the variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0-198. Random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 7(B). The normal symbol suitability determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol suitability determination). The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-240.

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. Pachinko game machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for special symbols and normal symbols, the variation time shortening function for special symbols and normal symbols, and the opening extension function of the second start port 21 is activated or not It has a plurality of game states depending on the combination that becomes the operating state. The state in which the probability variation function is operating for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "low probability state". In the high-probability state (big-hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being judged as a big-hit in the special symbol suitability judgment is higher than in the low-probability state (big-hit probability: 1/315). That is, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to perform the hit/fail determination. The table is used to determine whether or not the item is correct (see FIG. 8(A)). That is, when the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the probability of the result of the variation display of the special symbols becoming a big hit (a stopped pattern becomes a big win pattern) becomes higher than when it is not activated. Incidentally, the means (main control section) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of special symbol suitability determination (big hit probability) is called "probability setting means".

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol variation time in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective entry into the starting port (an entry that can be remembered as a special figure reservation) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player, as shown in FIG. there is State A (low probability low base state) and state B (low probability high base state) shown in FIG. , high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player performs a right-handed game and enters the game ball into the third start port 26, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed, and the second special symbol. fluctuates. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol in state A is set to a very long time (missing 600 seconds, jackpot 110 seconds, small hit 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state is also called "first condition state"). Since it is in the low base state (first game state), it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 .

Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even when the second special symbol is variably displayed by mistake in the state A, the game ball is entered into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the end of the variative display of the second special symbol. , it is possible to variably display the first special symbol.

On the other hand, in the state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), in the high base state (second game state), and since the first special symbol time saving function is operating, a right-handed game is performed Thus, it is possible to enter a ball into both the second start opening 21 and the third start opening 26 which are in the open state. In state B, as in state A, the second special symbol time saving function does not operate. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting hole 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed, but the variation time of the second special symbol is a very long time. Since it is set to (loss 600 seconds, big win 110 seconds, small win 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol suitability determination is executed and the first special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, the operation of the first special pattern time saving function is set to the first special pattern time saving state, the first special pattern propriety determination is executed more frequently than in the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, as a state mainly for the second special symbol propriety determination, there is a state C (high-probability-low base state) shown in FIG. In state C (high-probability-low base state), since the second special symbol time-saving function is operating, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering the third start port 26 by playing a right-handed game. becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol validity determination is executed, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, the operation of the second special symbol time-saving function is set to the second special symbol time-saving state, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed at a higher frequency than the state A and the state B, and the game proceeds smoothly. can be done. This makes it possible to execute the second special symbol suitability determination which is more advantageous than the first special symbol suitability determination.

In the state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol validity determination is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Since the pattern fluctuation time is set to a very long time (missing 600 seconds, jackpot 110 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even if the ball is entered in the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, or if there is a pending memory related to the first special symbol propriety determination, than the second special symbol propriety determination It is possible to reduce the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol propriety determination is executed as much as possible.

In this way, both the state B and the state C are states in which a right-handed game is performed, but in the state B, similarly to the state C, the game state is mainly performed by determining whether the first special symbol is appropriate, and the state C Then, it is set as a game state in which the second special symbol propriety determination is mainly performed. As a result, in the normal state (low-probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, the jackpot is hit, and after shifting to the right-handed game, in the so-called consecutive period (right-handed state), the first special symbol propriety determination and a game state mainly for judging whether the second special symbol is right or wrong, thereby diversifying the playability. In addition, the game state in which the first special symbol success/failure determination is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol success/failure determination is mainly performed have different types as a big hit (jackpot game) that can occur, so right-handed hitting During the continuation of the game, different big wins (big win games) are generated by the transition of these game states. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game and enhance the interest in the game.

Also, when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, that is, when the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the game smoothly without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game by playing the right-handed game. 2 special symbol variation game) can be executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, the first special symbol time saving function is not operated (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the normal state) However, the first special symbol time saving function may be operated. In state B, the number of balls held is maintained or slightly reduced, and in state C, the number of balls held is increased.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function (the first special symbol time saving function or the second special symbol time saving function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for normal symbols are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the normal symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function operate in a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), and operate in a low base state (low probability low base state, high probability low base condition). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the probability of winning in the normal symbol suitability determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "normal high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined as a hit is larger than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A, C). Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol success determination (normal symbol determination) is performed (see FIG. 8(C)). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variable display of the normal symbols will be a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

Also, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is shorter than in the low base state. In the present embodiment 1, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state and 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Concretely, when the result of the normal symbol suitability determination is a hit in the low base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds), and opens. The second starting port is open during the period of operation. In addition, when the result of the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol wins in the high base state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Also, the closing time between opening motions in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening/closing member 37 is made different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the low base state opening may be performed once for 2.7 seconds, and the high base state may be performed three times for 2.0 seconds. Also, the opening operation in the high base state may be 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which is larger than the number of openings in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable winning device 22 is activated.

In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable prize winning device 22 for normal symbols are operated, so that compared to the low base state in which these functions are not operating , the period in which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol suitability determination increases. In addition, as described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand.

Also, if the opening time is the same, the possibility of the game ball passing through the second starting port 21 can be reduced when the number of times of opening is smaller. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to 6.0 seconds once open, and the fluctuation time of the normal design is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal pattern fluctuation, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 during the normal pattern fluctuation time. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before it passes through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. In addition, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is placed on the front side of the game ball. It is made of a material with a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the game ball flowing speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed lower than the speed of the game rapid flow in the game ball passage on the near side. In addition, as a mode for reducing the flow rate, the inclination angle may be made loose, or an obstruction member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow rate may be provided. Also, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second big winning opening 35 is in an open state (a state in which a ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second start opening 21 and enters the second opening. It is difficult to enter the ball into the big winning hole 35. - 特許庁In addition, the third out port 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the second big winning hole 35 from entering the second big winning hole 35.例文帳に追加

A high base state may not be one in which all of the above functions are active. That is, the probability variation function for normal symbols, the variation time reduction function, and the operation of at least one of the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22, the second start port than when the function is not in operation 21 should be easily released (high frequency of ball entry). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1, it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether the second special symbol is appropriate than when determining whether the first special symbol is appropriate. There is a possibility of trying to variably display the second special symbol without variably displaying it. That is, even in the normal state (low-probability base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low-probability-low base state), the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is extremely long compared to the variation time of the first special symbol (average variation time) Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state (even if the ball is entered into the third start port 26), it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very high. has become bad. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to variably display the first special symbol by the left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by the right-handed game. Here, "the state in which the first special symbol is not in play (non-playing state)" means that the first special symbol is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of pending first special symbols is "0 ”. In addition, "the state in which the second special symbol is not in play (non-game state)" means that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of pending second special symbols is "0". It means that

In addition, in a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the frequency that the second start port 21 is in an open state improves, and the first special symbol time saving function allows the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is shortened, and the efficiency of the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, the game can be progressed advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the first special symbol propriety determination rather than performing the left-handed game. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol propriety determination, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the second start port 21. - 特許庁

In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time-saving function, and the game efficiency in the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game advantageously by playing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol propriety determination which is advantageous for the player. In addition, in the high probability and low base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is the same as the low probability and low base state (normal state), and is executed based on the entering ball to the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol to be changed (compared to the low probability base state) for a long time. In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, the probability variation function, the variation time reduction function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for normal symbols are not operating, so the entry to the second start port 21 The ball frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, prize balls based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol success/failure determination prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit by a small win (small win probability: 420/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes the small win to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the possession ball by (occurring multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), by frequently hitting the ball to the second start port 21 by the right-handed game, the ball to the second start port 21 Aim to generate the next big hit by the first special pattern right/wrong judgment without greatly reducing the number of balls held by acquiring the prize balls for. In this embodiment, the number of winning balls based on the entry into the second starting hole 21 is set to 1, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting hole 21, the game There is no ball increase (maintenance). In addition, in this embodiment, about 75 to 85% of the game balls hit to the right are set to enter the second start hole 21, so unless the ball enters another ball hole, high base If the condition is continued for a long time, it is designed to reduce the holding ball slightly. Further, by adjusting the game pegs around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the ball entry rate of the game ball to the second starting port 21.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the high-probability-low base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the right-handed game by the second special symbol propriety determination based on the ball entering the third start port 26, resulting in a high probability. To increase the number of balls held in a small winning game during a low base state, and to aim at generating the next big winning by a second special symbol right/wrong determination more advantageous than the first special symbol right/wrong determination. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the high-probability-low base state, the longer the period during which the next big win does not occur (the longer the period of the high-probability-low base state lasts), the more small wins are generated. Opportunities for (executing a small winning game) increase, which is advantageous to the player.

[Description of board structure and game state]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various ball entrances are arranged from the upstream side of the game area: a gate 28 (start gate 29), a first big winning opening 30, a first The second starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimum order. In addition, since the game ball flow-down passage of the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. , passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening and closing member 32 of the first big prize opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second winning opening 35 It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 37 and to the out port 34 . Then, if there is a winning opening in the open state in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and enters the game area downstream. It has a bad structure. Also, the remaining 10% or so that does not flow into the gate 28 side enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged out of the gaming machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the rate at which game balls flow into the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbols do not change) when the normal symbol reservation becomes "0". That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the most upstream of the right game area, almost all right-handed game balls can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning holes are open. In addition, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows downstream in the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not prevent the ball from entering other winning holes.

When the right-handed game is performed in the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and the determination whether to open the second start port 21 is executed be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of winning the normal symbols is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates to open the second starting port 21 . That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol suitability determination is executed, and the normal symbol is variably displayed, before the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second start port 21, the second 2 starting port 21 will be in an open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second start port 21 is also one time of 6.0 seconds, as long as the right-handed game is continued, the second start port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second. , Then open once for 6.0 seconds, close during the normal pattern fluctuation time of 1 second, then open once for 6.0 seconds, and repeat the cycle (closed for 1 second → 6 0 seconds open→1 second closed→approximately 6.0 seconds open→...).

Therefore, when a right-handed game is played in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B go to the second starting port 21. The ball will be entered. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol propriety determination is executed. In the first special symbol success/failure determination, in the high-probability/high-base state, there is a probability of 1/63 that a big hit will occur, and a small hit will not occur, and a failure will occur with a probability of 62/63.

First, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out, the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28, and most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls are in the open state. The ball enters the second starting port 21, and the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching before the second starting port 21, and do not flow down to the second starting port 21, and the third starting port. 26 or flows into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol propriety determination is continuously (highly) executed. In addition, since one prize ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second start port 21, the reduction speed of the ball is reduced and the first special symbol propriety judgment is executed, and the next big hit is performed. It is possible to aim. Also, when one ball enters the third starting port 26, one prize ball is discharged.

Next, when the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination is a big win, the first big prize winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big win type shown in FIG. . Also, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big winning game. As a result, when the jackpot game is started, the game ball flowing down due to the game hitting to the right smoothly enters the first big winning hole without being blocked by other winning holes such as the second starting hole 21.例文帳に追加Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big prize winning port 30, the state shifts to the low base state during the big win game, but in the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 is activated even in the low base state. Since the specification is such that it can be in an open state, the game ball that flows down the right game area during the jackpot game enters the second start port 21 first and does not enter the second start port 21. A situation occurs in which only the ball enters the second big winning hole 30 .

Moreover, since only one prize ball is entered into the second start hole 21, the execution time of the jackpot game is unnecessarily lengthened, and there is no merit for the player. On the contrary, the game becomes redundant and does not proceed smoothly, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in the present embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the jackpot game can be smoothly progressed. Become. Since the first big winning hole 30 is not opened except during the big winning game, the first big winning hole 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting hole 21 when the big winning game is not in progress. do not have.

Next, the high-probability-low base state will be described. The high-probability-low base state is a low base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting to the right. When a right-handed game is performed in the high-probability-low base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and the determination of whether or not the second starting port 21 is to be opened (ordinary symbol validity determination) is executed. In the low-base state (high-probability-low-base state), the variation time of normal symbols is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high-base state, and the probability of winning the normal symbols is also lower than in the high-base state. (1/240), after the game ball passes through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if the game ball hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second start port 21 opens. state. Since the probability of winning is set to 1/240, it is almost impossible to lose and the second starting port 21 is open. In addition, instead of such a mode, the probability of winning in the normal symbol suitability determination in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all the symbols may be lost. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be open in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

That is, in the high-probability-low base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in an open state is set very low, so the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 is in the second starting port 21 It is set to have a low possibility of entering the ball and a high possibility of passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reaching the entrance of the second big prize winning port 35 . In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol right or wrong judgment will be a small hit is the same whether it is a high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) or high probability low base state. do not have. That is, the small-hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small-hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol suitability determination has a small hit.

A game ball flowing downstream of the first big winning port 30 through the upper surface of the opening/closing member 32 is branched into a third start port 26 side passage and a second start port 21 side passage by a branch portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the third starting port 26 side passage enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol propriety determination is executed. In addition, in the high-probability-low base state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, it is unlikely that the second start port 21 will be in an open state, so the game ball that has flowed into the second start port 21 side passage is almost All of them flow down to the side of the second big prize winning opening 35 and the third out opening 34 c provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21 .

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 , it will be in the open state in the opening and closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Specifically, six 0.3 second opening motions are performed (0.1 second closing time between opening motions, 1.8 seconds total opening time). Then, the game ball flowing into the second starting port 21 side passage passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state, flows down to the second big winning port 35, and is opened by the small winning game. The ball is entered into the second prize-winning opening 35 which is .

The prize balls based on the entry into the second big prize opening 35 are made to enter the second big prize prize opening 35 during the small winning game because ten prize balls are made for one entering ball. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of balls held during the high-probability-low base state. In addition, since the high-probability-low base state continues at least until the next big hit is generated by the special symbol success/failure determination, the longer the high-probability-low base state continues, the more the player can increase the number of possession balls. It becomes possible. In addition, in the high-probability-high base state, since the second special symbol time-saving state and the first special symbol fluctuation time are set to a long time (first special symbol long-time state), the second special symbol propriety determination is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol propriety determination. In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to acquire about 20 prize balls (two winning balls) on average by occurrence of one small winning game. It is also possible to increase a large amount of game balls (for example, 200 in 10 times) by causing this small winning game to occur a plurality of times (many times) until the next big win occurs. In addition, as the total winning balls of the ``continuous period'' in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls of the big winning game and the winning balls of the small winning game can be added, and a larger amount of game balls can be acquired. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big winning (only for big winning) and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream (most downstream among them) than the second starting opening 21 are for small winning ( It is considered to be a big prize mouth for small hits only). In addition, by arranging the second large winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for a small hit, downstream of the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening/closing control) of the second starting opening 21 allows the second large winning opening to be opened. The number (proportion) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening and closing control of the second start port 21 (time to be in the open state, normal symbol fluctuation time, normal symbol success/failure determination), the high base state ( The possibility of the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is higher in the high-probability-low base state than in the low-probability-high base state and the high-probability-high base state. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), The effect of the opening/closing control of the second starting port 21 is made more effective.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the low probability high base state in which a small winning game can occur, the second start port 21 is configured so as not to be in an open state (it may be configured not to be open at all), so a small winning is possible. It is difficult to adjust the rate of entering a ball into the second big winning hole 35 when a game is played by entering a ball into the second starting hole 21 . Therefore, a third out port 34c is provided between the second starting port 21 and the second big prize winning port 35, and by making it possible to adjust the ball entry rate to the third out port 34c, the second big prize winning is achieved. The rate of ball entry into the mouth 35 is adjustable.

In addition, as a result, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is entered into the second start port 21 to substantially maintain the possession ball (including a slight increase or slight decrease) (or suppress the speed of the possession ball decrease) while), a state (high base state) in which the game is played in anticipation that the result of the first special symbol success/failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big win), and a game ball is entered into the third start port 26 and a small A state in which a game is played in anticipation of a big win (advantageous big win) as a result of the judgment of the second special symbol, while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning hole 35 when a win occurs (high probability, low probability). base state), and diversify the playability. Also, this makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. For the player, the high-probability/low-base state in which the number of held balls can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) and a high probability low base state. Diversify and increase amusement interest.

In addition, the start gate 29 is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B by also serving as the gate 28 . As a result, in the case of a big win standby state, the game ball is allowed to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being blocked from passing through the start gate 29 by the second start port 21 or the like, and the big win game is started. It becomes possible to The starting gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the starting gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is required to be provided upstream from the second starting port 21, the third starting port 26, and the second big prize winning port 35. - 特許庁

Further, when the right-handed game should be performed, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner, and informs that the game should be shot to the right-handed game area. In addition, when the left-handed game should be performed, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display-controlled) in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the left game area. Specifically, the shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two "yz" LEDs, and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: lights off, ▪: lights on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting up both LEDs such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state when the variable display of the identification information (special pattern, effect pattern) is performed is "low-probability-low base state", "high-probability-low base state", " It is possible to control either "low probability high base state" and "high probability high base state", but among them, the low probability low base state is also called "normal game state", and the high probability low base state It is also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. FIG. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the program of the main control main processing shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter settings. Reset, etc. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Also, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In addition, in the examples and drawings, the normal design is "general pattern", the special design is "special design", the first special design is "special design 1" or "first special design", and the second special design is "special design". 2” or “second special figure”.

After the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 .

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands to be output here include the game state, the result of the special symbol suitability determination, the symbol as the big hit type, the information related to the variation pattern, and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input processing (S202) that follows the output processing (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, third starting sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 , the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, the general ball winning hole sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Also, a detection signal from a lower tray full switch for detecting the fullness of the surplus ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as "lower tray") is taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower tray full data.

Then, a normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal design/special design main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts). As a result, randomness is imparted to the acquired values of various random numbers.

After the normal design/special design main random number update process (S203), the later-described start opening sensor detection process (S204), start ball time process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), special figure 1 operation process (S207) ), special figure 2 operation processing (S208), number of pending balls processing (S209), and power off monitoring processing (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) ends. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (about 4 msec later), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal design reservation balls (the number of normal design reservations, specifically the number of normal design reservations provided in the RAM) value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, in S301, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

In S302, when it is determined that the number of normal design reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored (S303), and normal symbol random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter for normal symbol validity determination (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7(B)) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquisition random value (acquisition information, general pattern acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reservation balls out of the general pattern reservation storage section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start hole sensor 20a or the second start hole sensor 21a. Judge (S305). At S305, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (NO at S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, in S305, when it is determined that the game ball entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reservations, specifically It is determined whether the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservation provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, in S306, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. In S306, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls stored (S307), and special figure 1 related random number acquisition Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the value of the counter (label-TRND-AS) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (the value of the random number shown in FIG. 7(A)), Figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 pending balls out of the first special figure pending storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the third starting hole 26, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the third starting hole sensor 26a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, in S309, if it is determined that the game ball entered the third start port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically the main control It is determined whether or not the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, in S310, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. In S310, if it is determined that the number of special 2 pending balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), add "1" to the number of stored special 2 pending balls (S311), special 2 related Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing ends.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7 (A) random value), and store those obtained random values in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reserved balls out of the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Starting ball entry process]
Next, the starting ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start entrance sensor detection process (S204) and then the start ball entry process (S205). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start-up ball processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of special-figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting opening. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (acquired information) is read ( S316). Next, the acquisition random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the obtained random numbers read out, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (special symbol success/failure determination random number) is determined according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). If the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big win is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) by this S317 is a prejudgment (so-called "reservation look-ahead ”).

In addition, the prior determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8 (A)), that is, if it is a high probability state, it is a jackpot determination table for a high probability state, if it is a normal state (low probability state) For example, based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for normal state (for low probability state) and for high probability state (for high probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win, and whether or not a game effect with a high degree of reliability of the big win is to be executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the result of determination by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for special symbol success/failure determination matches the big hit determination value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random number for determining the jackpot type) (jackpot type information), information indicating whether the random number for special symbol success/failure determination matches the small hit determination value (small hit information ), command data including information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start ball command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S316 may be sent to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number is not transmitted as it is, and the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information etc.) acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether it is information related to the big hit, the type of the big hit, or information related to the small hit The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Also, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will occur when the determination is made in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the production hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether it is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not performance suspension information determined to be a big hit is stored.

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong among the acquired random numbers read in S316 is not sent as it is to the sub-control unit, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (jackpot Random number for type determination), information indicating the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number), and information indicating the result of the preliminary determination Generate command data as a special figure 2 start ball command, can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 has increased by "1" (S319) in the same manner as in the processing relating to special figure 2 described above. Then, when it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number at S311 in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole. On the other hand, in S319, when it is determined that the number of Toku-zu 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is to perform the processing similar to that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting entrance sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (S321), Pre-judgment is performed for the obtained random number value read out (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this prior determination is generated as a special figure 1 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). It should be noted that the prior determination of S322 (suspended prefetch) is performed prior to the validity determination in the special figure 1 validity determination process described later.

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entering process (S205). In the general pattern operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform normal design fluctuation process (S404), and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), normal design confirmation Processing (S406) is performed, and when "normal figure operation status" is "4" (S401, S403, S405 are all NO), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal design waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that it is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0" in S501 (NO in S501), the normal symbol validity determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the game state is a low base state (states A, C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Also, following the normal design variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal design random number shift process described later is performed (S504), then the normal design variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In normal design fluctuation start processing (S505), normal design fluctuation display is started in the normal design fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Also, in the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of normal symbol variation.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
Next, the normal symbol suitability determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the state B flag is ON, that is, the high base state (YES in S602), the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on the value "0" to "238"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for judging normal symbol validity (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit judgment values.

On the other hand, in S602, the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in the low base state (NO in S602), state A (state C) of the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) Based on the table for (hit determination value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not it is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong determination (S603, S604) determines whether it is a hit (per general figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is off A normal pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608 ) to end the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
Next, normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the normal pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
Next, the process during normal design fluctuation (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal design fluctuation process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S801), and when it is determined that it has not passed (NO in S801) processing Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has elapsed (YES in S801), set the normal pattern fluctuation stop command (S802), set the normal pattern operation status to "3" (S803), and then display the normal pattern fluctuation, Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hitting normal symbol or losing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol propriety determination is performed (S804), and the process is finished.

[Normal design confirmation process]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal design determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern per flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the normal pattern per flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the per normal pattern flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). In S902, when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), move to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second starting port open counter that counts the number of times the second starting port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening for state A and state C (for low base state) as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) Set a pattern (S906) and proceed to S904. The release pattern for state A and state C (for low base state) is, as described above, a release pattern that performs 0.9 second release three times. Therefore, "3" is set in the second starting port open counter. In S904, the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the normal electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In normal electric accessary product processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal pattern is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003). If so (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), control to open the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. Also, in S1002, if it is determined that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after opening the second start port 21, (S1005), and if it is determined that it is not time to close the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that it is time to close the second starting port (YES in S1005), processing is performed to close the second starting port 21 (S1006), and the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second opening opening counter is "0" (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, in S1008, if it is determined that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), end processing per normal pattern to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag per normal pattern is set ( S1010), and finish the process. It should be noted that the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times during the state B (high base state). Also during the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, in S1001, if it is determined that the end flag per normal pattern is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. , Turns off the normal pattern per end flag (S1011), turns off the normal pattern per flag (S1012), sets the normal pattern operation status to "1" (S1013), and ends the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special figure 1 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 operation processing (S207) next to normal figure operation processing (S206). This special figure 1 operation processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. FIG. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the processing related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of those stages. And, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105 ), special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "4" (S1101, S1103, S1105 both NO, S1107 YES), special electric as a big hit game Accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107 are all NO), the process ends. In addition, the special figure 1 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Also, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol suitability determination, the special electric auditors processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol suitability determination. You may In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric auditors processing 2 as a small winning game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls) of the first starting port 20 is "0" (S1201). In S1201, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0", that is, there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not special figure 2 is in play (S1207). Then, in S1207, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is in play (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, in S1207, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not in play (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed to be the standby screen (demonstration screen for customer waiting is being executed) It is determined whether or not (S1208), and if it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not being displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing ends.

Also, in S1201, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not "0", that is, there is one or more stored random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first start port 20 (in S1201 NO), special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203), special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), special figure 1 variation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "the special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in play" means that the special figure 2 is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" means that Of course, it means that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
Next, the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203), first, as the determination value, stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (ie RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol propriety judgment random number counter (the oldest memory) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit (S1602). In S1602, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether the other special symbol is a big hit, it is not determined whether it is a big hit or not. It is regarded as one of the outliers (that is, it is never judged as a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol suitability determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination executed during that time is Everything is out. In S1602, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the variation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then the probability variation flag is ON or not, i.e. It is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for normal state (for low probability state) out of the jackpot determination table (Fig. 8 (A)) Based on the table (big hit determination values are "3" and "397"), determination is made (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability flag is ON (YES in S1603), the winning determination is performed based on the high-probability state jackpot determination table (S1605). In the high-probability state jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", and "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a big hit (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the big hit type (label -TRND- AS) is read, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Turn ON the big hit variation flag in FIG. 1 (S1610) and finish the process. In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. In addition, when it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, one of the 15R first big win, the 4R second big win, the 4R third big win, and the 4R fourth big win is executed. . Also, if it is determined to be a big hit in the judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2), one of the 15R 5th big hit, 2R 6th big hit, and 2R 7th big hit is executed (Fig. 8(B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the design is determined to be out (S1607), and the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the jackpot change flag, the first jackpot change flag indicating that the first special symbol is performing the change display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. and a second big hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing variation display related to the big win (variation display in which the big win symbol is stopped and displayed), and a main control unit 80 A corresponding flag is set in the jackpot variation flag storage means provided in the RAM. In addition, as a small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is performing a variation display related to a small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed). A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the big hit variation flag is set for one of the special symbols (that is, when the variation display related to the big hit is being performed), the process of determining whether or not the other special symbol is a big hit is performed. Not performed. In other words, control is not performed such that both of the special symbols execute the variable display relating to the big hit in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in an extremely short time, and to moderately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) next to the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203). As shown in Figures 24 and 25, the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) first determines whether or not the gaming state is state A (whether or not the low probability base state) (S1701). Then, in S1701, if it is determined that it is in state A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON If determined (YES in S1702), referring to the state A jackpot table (the part corresponding to the state A and jackpot of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). It should be noted that if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. Further, in the present embodiment 1, one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of variation time is selected according to the status A jackpot table.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether the number of pending balls (number of pending) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). In S1705, if it is determined that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number deviation table (of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 1, 2) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In Example 1, the variation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

Also, in S1705, if it is determined that the number of reservations is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of reservations is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second reservation number deviation table (Fig. 9 of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In Example 1, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works, and the average variation time is shortened.

Also, in S1701, if it is determined that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) is determined (S1708). In S1708, when it is determined that it is in state B (S1708), then it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON ( YES in S1709), state B jackpot table (part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuates based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). In Example 1, the variation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. In S1709, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (part corresponding to state B and deviation from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In Example 1, the variation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Also, in S1708, if the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, if it is determined that the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9 A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the variation pattern table shown in FIG. In Example 1, the variation pattern P23 is selected. In S1712, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (part corresponding to state C and deviation from the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In Example 1, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processes shown in FIG. 24 are executed (S1704), and the process ends. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, when the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003" , address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored) RAM corresponding to the fourth second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1803) and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol 1 fluctuation]
Next, the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 fluctuation process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (variation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has passed It is determined whether or not (S1901). In S1901, if it is determined that the variation time of the special figure 1 has not passed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 variation interruption process is performed (S1914), and the process is finished. On the other hand, in S1901, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). In S1904, if it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of special symbol fluctuations executed during state B (high base state) is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the state B counter value is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the game state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low probability high base state, it shifts to a low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, since "10000" is set to the state B counter in the high-precision high base state, even if the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation, the value of the state B counter will not become "0". do not have. That is, the high-probability-high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variable display of the special symbol is stopped with the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number Others such as (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) is during fluctuation display of special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1, and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big win game or the small win game is finished. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success/failure determination process and the variable display related to the other special symbol are not executed.

Special Figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), if it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then the special It is determined whether or not the big hit flag in FIG. 2 is ON, that is, whether or not the big hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). In S2902, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game according to special figure 2 is being executed (S2909). In S2909, the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process is terminated. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, in S2902, if it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn ON the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time (S2904), and finish the process. Thereby, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Also, in S2901, the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already being interrupted (YES in S2901), whether the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON is determined (S2905). In S2905, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the big hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON in S2905 (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). In S2906, when it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is judged that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, in S2906, if it is determined that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), resumes the measurement of Toku-zu 1 fluctuation time (S2908), and ends the process. As a result, the interrupted variable display of the first special symbol (time measurement of variable time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as "first interruption flag") indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol It has a special figure 2 suspension flag (also referred to as a "second suspension flag") that indicates that the variable display is being suspended, and a flag corresponding to the suspension flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit variation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being turned OFF (S2002), and the first A special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating execution of a jackpot game related to special symbols is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in the special figure 1, it is possible to indicate that the variation display relating to the big win is terminated (the big win is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big win game.

In S2004, it is determined whether the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined to be a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (1 round 1 time open mode, A round counter counts the number of times (from the opening to closing of the big winning slot in one round) is set to "15" (S2005), and a big winning opening command is set to start the big winning game (S2006). ), set the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2007), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "4" (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2006. Also, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbols to be variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variable display of the special symbols has ended. In addition, thereby, it will be in a jackpot standby state. Also, in S2001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit variation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, because it is a variation display related to the deviation, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S2009), and the process ends.

Here, in the present embodiment 1, as the big hit flag, the result of the hit/fail judgment related to the first special symbol is a big hit, and the special figure 1 big hit flag ("first big hit flag”), and a special figure 2 big hit flag (also called “second big hit flag”) indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a big win and the big win game related to the big win is being executed. , and when a big-hit game is executed, a big-hit flag corresponding to the big-hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also known as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit/fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a small hit and that the small hit game related to the small hit is in progress ), and when a small-hit game is executed, a small-hit flag corresponding to a small-hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a lamp for 2R, a lamp for 4R, and a lamp for 15R, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second jackpot is won, the display mode is such as "2RΔ4R▴15RΔ" (for example, ▲: lights on, Δ: lights off). Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39, the special figure 2 operation processing (S211) etc. will be described. In the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), the special figure 1 operation processing ( S206) and the like are performed in the same flow, so the explanation will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, special figure 2 operation processing (S208) performs processing in the same flow as special figure 1 operation processing (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 operation processing (S208) next to special figure 1 operation processing (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment 1 is capable of executing variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by these special figure 1 operation processing and special figure 2 operation processing. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation and the digestion of the second special symbol reservation ("variation display of the first special symbol and variation display of the second special symbol", "first special symbol validity judgment and second special symbol ) can be executed in parallel. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, the success/failure determination (second special symbol success/failure determination) based on the ball entering the second starting port is the success/failure determination (first special symbol success/failure determination) based on the ball entering the first starting port. Judgment), the player is more likely to win a large profit (large amount of profit that can be obtained) (FIG. 8(B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, like the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the processing related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages. Divided and assigned "special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" to each stage. And, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2" (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "3" (NO in both S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155 ), special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156) is performed, and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "4" (S1151, S1153, S1155 both NO, S1157 YES), special electric as a big hit game Accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), special electric accessory processing as a small winning game 2 (S1109) is performed. In addition, the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol propriety determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) that is not present in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric auditors processing 1 (S1108) is common processing between the special figure 1 operation processing (S206) and the special figure 2 operation processing (S211), and the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109) Special Figure 2 operation processing (S211) only processing. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is capable of simultaneously executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. This is because the jackpot game related to the two special symbols cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol suitability determination may have a small hit. In this case, like the jackpot game, both the small winning game related to the first special symbol and the small winning game related to the second special symbol are made non-executable in parallel (only one of them is executable).

[Special symbol 2 standby process]
The special symbol 2 waiting process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 waiting process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, so the explanation is omitted.

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
The special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, in the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) Read out the stored random number counter value for special symbol suitability determination (label-TRND-A). In addition, since it has a small hit in the result of the second special symbol propriety determination, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol propriety determination It is determined whether the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined that it is a small hit in S1305 (YES in S1305), the small hit design is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit variation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is finished. Other processing is the same as the special figure 1 propriety determination processing (S1203).

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420 )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) to select a variation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

In addition, in the state C, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the second special symbol (determining whether the second special symbol is appropriate or not). Therefore, in the state C, there are more types of variation patterns (variation times) of the second special symbol than the variation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (capable of executing various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Also, the variation time of the first special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, thereby lowering the variation efficiency of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the state A and the state B, the game is played mainly by the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol suitability determination). Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and various times (various game effects) executable) variation pattern can be selected. Therefore, in state A and state B, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types). Also, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, thereby lowering the variation efficiency of the second special symbol.

In addition, since state A and state B are gaming states in which the game is played mainly by the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the second special symbol is deactivated, and the variation time of the second special symbol is set long. Specifically, in the state A and the state B, when the second special symbol success/failure determination is executed, when the result of the success/failure determination is a big hit, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds. (P12 or P20). This is set to a variation time shorter than the longest variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is a big hit in state A. - 特許庁Further, in the state B, the variation time is set to be shorter than the longest variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is a big hit.

In the states A and B, the second special symbol success/failure determination is not the subject of the success/failure determination, but if an excessively long variation time is set, the player himself/herself who has performed the success/failure determination of the big hit game related to the big hit may be executed. There is a possibility that the game will end without it. Therefore, as a result of the success/failure determination, when a big hit is achieved, instead of setting a long variation time unnecessarily, the variation time (the longest one) is set for the main first special symbol. Set a shorter fluctuation time than As a result, when the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is a big hit, the variable time for which the player can wait is set, and the player bears the disadvantage of not being able to get the profit from the big win. do not have. Moreover, since the possibility of a big hit occurring is low and the profit to be obtained is large, such control is adopted.

In addition, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set to the main first special symbol in state A. In addition, it is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set to the first special symbol that is the subject in the state B. Among the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in the states A and B, the variable display time when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit is set to be longer than the time when the big hit and the loss are made. set.

Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol right/wrong judgment which does not have a small win as a result of the right/wrong judgment, it is not desirable that the second special symbol right/wrong judgment is frequently caused by the small win. In addition, if there is a situation in which small hits can occur frequently, the malicious player executes the second special symbol success/failure determination despite the fact that the game state is based on the first special symbol success/failure determination. Therefore, there is a possibility that a game profit is obtained by a small hit. For example, in a game state in which a left-handed game should be played, a right-handed game may be played, and a game profit may be unfairly obtained by an inappropriate game. In order to prevent such a situation, in states A and B, if the result of the second special symbol propriety determination that is not the subject is a small hit, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time (the longest time), To prevent small hits (small hit games) from occurring frequently. In addition, since the game profit that can be obtained by one small winning game is not so large, the player who caused the small winning does not suffer much damage.

Also, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is out, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set to the main first special symbol in state A. Further, it is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the subject in the state B. In addition, the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in the states A and B is shorter than when the result of the determination of whether the second special symbol is a small win and longer than when the big win. set to By setting the variation time of the second special symbol to a long time when the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is out, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is reduced, and a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed is achieved. To prevent a player from playing an inappropriate game such as a right-handed game. As another aspect, the same variation time may be set for the big hit and the loss (for example, both may be set to 110 seconds, or both may be set to 600 seconds).

After selecting the variation pattern in this special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), other processes (S1404) are performed and this process ends. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1503) and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started do.

[Special symbol 2 fluctuation processing]
The special symbol 2 fluctuating process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 performs the process (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 fluctuating process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs processing (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 determination process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 performs the process (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special symbol 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, but it is as shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process, which will be described later, is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2102, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that turns ON when the player shoots a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing in the jackpot standby state and passes the game ball through the start gate 29. . After the special pattern is determined and stopped as a big win pattern and the big win is achieved, the game ball is passed through the start gate to turn on the big win start flag and progress the big win game (a round game is started). Here, when the game ball is not allowed to pass through the start gate 29 after the big win, the gaming machine is maintained in the big win standby state in which the big win can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a rest such as a restroom, a drink, or a phone call. After the break, the player shoots the game ball at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29, thereby making it possible to proceed with the big win game. Also, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game has been completely opened (the jackpot game has ended).

If it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), whether it is time (round start time) to open the big prize gate (first big prize gate 30), that is, whether it is time to start the first round by passing the start gate 29. Alternatively, it is determined whether the interval time between rounds has passed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the time to start the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2105, when it is determined that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the big winning opening opening process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. As a result, the first big winning hole 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) corresponding to the type of big win.

If it is determined in S2104 that the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole in that round (this implementation In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls entered (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not the time has come to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30), that is, the big winning hole It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has passed since the opening of the door (S2112). When it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been entered (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that either one of the two round end conditions has been established, the process of closing the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

On the other hand, in S2115, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2116), and a jackpot ending period is set. is started (S2117), the jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is finished. Also, in S2105, if it is determined that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2119, when it is determined that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2120), the game state setting processing described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2122). , The big hit start flag is turned OFF (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is finished.

[Jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the jackpot game start processing (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102), S2154 Go to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, in order to control to the low probability state and the low base state, before the start of the jackpot game (round game), the probability variation flag and the state B flag are turned OFF.

Also, if it is determined in S2152 that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning OFF the variable probability flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning OFF the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that it has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), the big hit game is started (to open the round game). The jackpot start flag is turned ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the start gate has not been passed (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the game machine is continued in the jackpot standby state. Also, in S2151, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (progress) the jackpot game at any timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game ended this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, 4R 3rd jackpot, 15R 5th jackpot, and 4R 6th jackpot are five kinds of probability variable jackpots. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, when it is determined that the variable probability big hit has ended this time (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), and then the finished big win game is either the 4R 3rd big win or the 4R 6th big win. It is determined whether there is (S2203).

In S2203, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is either the 4R third jackpot or the 4R sixth jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of maximum 10000 times is set after the end of the jackpot game, and a high probability high base state is established. The variable display of the special symbols cannot be executed 10,000 times during the business hours of the game parlor in one day. Therefore, by setting "10,000" to the state B counter, the next big win is substantially generated. means to continue the high base state (state B) until . It should be noted that the state B may be set to a number of times such as "10000" times, and the control may be such that the high base state (state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is neither the 4R third jackpot nor the 4R sixth jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the finished jackpot game is the 15R first jackpot, the 4R second jackpot, Or if it is determined to be either the 15R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag turned OFF. Thereby, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability-low base state.

In S2201, if it is determined that the end is not a probability variable jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the state B counter "100" is set (S2207), and the process ends. As a result, the high base state of 100 times is set after the end of the jackpot game, resulting in a low probability high base state.

The game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) that executes the game state setting process (S2121) functions as "game state control means".

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is a special symbol. 1 (YES in S3001), turn off the special figure 1 big hit flag (S3002), set the special figure 1 operation status to "1" (S3003), and finish the process. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001 ), turn off the special figure 2 big hit flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small winning end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has all ended in the small winning game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small winning has elapsed. Then, it is determined whether it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time interval between multiple times of opening has elapsed (S2303). . As for the small-hit game, the small-hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small-hit symbol regardless of passage through the start gate. In other words, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big win game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily decide the start time of the small win.

If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the big winning slot (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big winning hole (YES in S2303), the second big winning hole 35 is opened according to the small winning opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304) and processed. finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the opening operation six times, that is, six times. It is determined whether or not the total number of all game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). In S2306, if it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the big winning opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has passed (S2307). Then, in S2307, when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the opening operation has reached the prescribed number (10) (YES in S2306), the big winning hole (second big winning The port 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, in S2307, if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the opening counter for the small win is changed. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). In S2310, when it is determined that the value of the opening counter for the small hit is not "0" (NO in S2310), the process is finished as it is in order to start the next opening operation.

On the other hand, in S2310, when it is determined that the value of the open counter for small hits is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to small hit end processing in S2311. In S2311, as a small-hit ending process for ending the small-hit game, a small-hit ending command is set (S2311), a small-hit ending period is started (S2312), a small-hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish processing. It should be noted that the small winning opening counter becomes "0" when the big winning opening is opened six times.

Also, in S2301, if it is determined that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation has been completed six times (or a specified number of game balls have entered), so It is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and when it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2315), the process is finished. On the other hand, in S2315, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process ends. By generating a small win game in the high-probability-low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big win while increasing the number of balls held, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It should be noted that the variable probability flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON at the start of the small winning game. Also, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after execution of the small winning game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time If it is determined that is related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed Finish. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol propriety determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is never turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game that occurred this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101 ), turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. Thereby, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Processing of number of pending balls]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) next to the special figure 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the number of special 1 reserved balls, the number of special 2 reserved balls and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Then, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the information of the number of reserved balls to the sub control board 90, etc.) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is finished.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power interruption monitoring process (S210) following the pending ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is a power-off signal input (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine number of remaining fluctuations, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-described characteristic configuration, which provides unique effects not found in conventional pachinko gaming machines, and a comparison with conventional pachinko gaming machines. and have a remarkable effect. In the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, a big hit is achieved in the special symbol suitability determination (first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or second special symbol (also referred to as "second information"). A high-probability state occurs (a privilege is granted) based on a pattern (also referred to as a “specific display mode”)), and when a predetermined condition is met, a high-probability state (privilege) shall be terminated.

The processing (game state setting processing (S2121)) for providing this high probability state (privilege) can also be called "privilege providing means". In addition, the first special design and the performance design 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special design and the performance design 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variable display and stop display are performed, and the same result of judgment is shown. , ``Stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) with the jackpot symbol'' can be replaced with ``Stop display of the performance symbol with the winning performance symbol (specific display mode)''. .

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub-control section 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control section). The effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes a sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, at S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO at S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that these S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, even in the effect control microcomputer 91, the same processing as the power interruption monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11 is performed. When turned ON, the data relating to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . That is, the data related to the effect control at the time of power failure such as power failure is backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned on after recovering from a power failure such as a power failure (recovering from a power failure), unless the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 The state of returns to the state before the power failure occurred.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90 . The random number for determining the effect includes the random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, the random number for determining the previous effect that determines the previous effect, and the random number for determining the effect pattern that determines the effect pattern. There are random numbers, etc. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random number, the random number may be incremented by 2 instead of incremented by 1. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90 .

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as a "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are sent to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106 and the lamp control. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the corresponding control board, which is the command transmission destination. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various production devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command to produce various productions. (Production pattern game production, special game production related to winning game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control such as effect symbols executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 In addition, it is possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from a speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91 is checked. Judge (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined at S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES at S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 2 msec is input to the sub control board 90. FIG. In the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting lamp data for illuminating lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5, and outputting drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electric drive source). drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and driving data are created by 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. Then, watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process that is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. FIG. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302), which will be described later, is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed to store the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt processing in the RAM of the sub control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303). Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). After that, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating random numbers for effect determination are executed (S4305).

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and if it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401) , If it is determined that the process of S4403 has been received (YES in S4401), effect pending information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process of S4403 is performed. Effect pending information storage processing (S4402), various information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination random Numbers, game information such as fluctuation pattern random numbers), depending on the type of special design (1st special design, 2nd special design) and the number of special design pending balls at the time of sending and receiving the start ball command (at the time of command generation) , is stored in a predetermined effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in a shift memory format. For example, if the received starting ball command is a special figure 1 starting ball command corresponding to the number of pending balls "4" of special figure 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special figure 1 starting ball command Such information is stored as special figure 1 effect reserved information in an area corresponding to the number of reservations 4 out of the special figure 1 effect reserved information storage area. The effect pending information stored in this way is used for execution of various effects such as a variable effect, an advance notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage contents (effect pending information) of the effect pending information storage area in the sub control board 90 are stored in the special figure pending storage section (first special figure pending storage section, second special figure It matches the storage contents (obtained information) of the reserved storage unit). For this reason, the effect pending information storage area of the sub control board 90 can also be said to be "obtained information storage means".

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), variation production start processing ( S4404) is performed, the process proceeds to S4405, and when it is determined that the variation start command is not received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation production start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is judged that the fluctuation stop command is received (YES in S4405), the production design is stopped and displayed to change production. A fluctuation performance end process to end is performed (S4406). In the fluctuation production end processing (S4406), the production pattern 8 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation production end command for ending the fluctuation production is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect pattern 8 which has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A stop display is made and the variable performance (performance symbol game performance) is terminated. On the other hand, in S4405, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command is not received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end process. Incidentally, the variable production refers to various productions performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols.

Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a winning game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the winning game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing a winning game (big winning game, small winning game). ), the round start command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize winning opening in the round game This includes the first big winning slot entry command transmitted based on the ball entering 30, the second big winning slot entering ball command transmitted based on the ball entering the second big winning slot in the small winning game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game related commands have been received, and if not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407) , performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small win game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command specifying an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot identified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command A round effect command specifying a round effect corresponding to the round specified based on is set in the sub-output buffer, and if it is an ending command, an ending specifying an ending effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command Set the performance command to the sub-output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a big winning hole entry command (first big winning hole entry command, second big winning hole entry command), a big winning hole (first big winning hole) specified based on the command A ball-entering performance command designating a ball-entering performance corresponding to a ball entering the hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35) is set in the sub-output buffer. When various production commands related to these set winning games are transmitted to the image control board 100 by command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 adjusts the progress of the winning game to the opening production and round. Performance, ball-entering performance, etc. are executed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7 . Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, normal design variation start command and normal design variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. In the variable effect start processing (S4404), first, random number processing for effect determination (S4501) for acquiring various effect determination random numbers such as variable effect determination random numbers, advance notice effect determination random numbers, and effect pattern determination random numbers is performed. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing of receiving the variation start command from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is obtained from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the performance symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including the presence or absence of the notice effect), the effect symbols to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information specifying a variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And, the variation pattern specification command includes variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. The results and pattern information specifying the type of jackpot are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are those corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern specification command, by analyzing the variation pattern specification command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether (variation display of the production pattern) is related to the special figure 1 or related to the special figure 2. It should be noted that the variation pattern information, game state information, symbol information, etc. can be used in processes other than the variation performance start process to be executed thereafter.

Then, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the production mode to be executed. The mode status has any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to production mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to production mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to production mode C, mode status "4" corresponds to It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to identify the current rendering mode.

Here, the production mode is a mode of production mainly by the image display device 7, and if the production mode is different, part or all of the production mode of the game production such as the advance notice production and the ready-to-win production will be different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 varies depending on the production mode, such as the appearance of the production pattern 8 (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.), or the characters, items, and background images that appear. considered different. In addition, the effect pattern game effect can also be executed in a manner according to the effect mode, and when multiple game effects (notice effect, ready-to-win effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. can be In this embodiment, production modes A and B are executed when controlled to a low probability and low base state, production modes C and D are executed when controlled to a high probability and low base state, production mode E is executed when it is controlled to the low probability-high base state and when it is controlled to the high probability-high base state. Therefore, when the performance mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the performance mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low-probability-low base state or the high-probability-low base state. becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, even if the player confirms the production mode, it is difficult to grasp whether the current game state is the low-probability-high base state or the high-probability-high base state. be. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board surface lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, etc. are used, and the sub-control unit 90 is the main control of the variable effect pattern (variable effect pattern, effect pattern (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the variable production pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice production determination table are set. . That is, it has a plurality of variable performance pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice performance determination tables, and based on the game state (performance mode) etc. from them, a predetermined fluctuation performance pattern determination table and a predetermined notice performance determination table are set. do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), as a variation production pattern determination table, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current production mode A variable performance pattern determination table and a notice performance determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (variation mode of the effect symbol, etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status) ( (not shown) are stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current production mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those fluctuation production pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the variable production determination random number acquired in S4501 and the fluctuation production pattern determination table set in S4504, select a variation production pattern that matches the specified variation pattern and set it ( S4505). As the variable effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the production pattern game production, when executing a reach production (ready production pattern game production), or when executing a character production using a specific character (character production pattern game production), reach production and character A case where the production is not executed (reach non-production symbol game production) or the like is determined. In addition, the ready-to-win effect is, for example, as a display mode of the effect pattern 8 when the result of the special symbol propriety determination indicates that the result is a big hit, the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same (double). In the case where a different mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stop display (temporary stop display) with patterns (same production patterns) constituting the big hit mode ), and in a state in which the remaining one continues to be variablely displayed (scrolled), whether or not the remaining one performance pattern is stopped and displayed in the pattern (three same performance symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It refers to a production that shows At this time, along with the variable display of the performance symbols, a predetermined character is used to execute a game performance, and whether the performance symbols are stop-displayed in a jackpot mode is determined, and whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of Such a game effect (a ready-to-win effect and a character effect, which will be described later) can also be referred to as a story effect (specific game effect) or a purpose effect (specific game effect). As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the big win and heighten the amusement of the game.

In addition, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the performance symbol acquired in S4501 and a stop symbol determination table (not shown), the performance symbol 8 to be stopped and displayed (also referred to as "stop performance symbol") is determined and set. The performance symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the performance symbol game performance is the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out, and in the case of reach presence or failure, three performance symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787" are displayed. One of the production patterns is a loose eye that is different from the other production patterns, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said to be a barakeme with different production patterns

In addition, in S4506, the notice effect (prediction effect pattern) to be executed along with the variable effect pattern (effect symbol game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as performance symbol game performance including the notice performance to be executed. This advance notice effect indicates the possibility that the result of the effect pattern game effect being executed will be stopped in a big hit mode, before the effect pattern is displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect pattern). notification performance). In S4506, based on the notice effect determination random number obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, a notice effect (notice effect pattern) that matches the specified variation pattern and the determined change effect pattern is selected. , set this (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variable effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect etc. is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), end the fluctuation effect start processing. When the variable effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 outputs the variable effect pattern specified based on the variable effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variable effect pattern set in 1 is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variable effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, a variable display (blinking display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Overview of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the production symbol game production (fluctuation production) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variable effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variable effect pattern etc. set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the production pattern 8 is started on the display screen 7a. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbols 8, the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is configured.

The variable display of the production pattern 8 is, in principle, scrolled vertically in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (ascending order) ( vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" again and repeats the vertical scrolling. The aspect of the variable display of such performance symbols 8 is determined by the variable performance pattern stored in the above-described variable performance pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various types of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling), switching display in which patterns (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling, and the like. It is possible to provide a mode as a variable production pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set the aspect of the variable display depending on the production mode and the game state.

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbols 8 is performed according to the variable time determined by the variable pattern of the special symbols, and the variable display is stopped as the variable time elapses. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stopping mode, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stopping order") of each of the performance symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol” (also referred to as “first stop mode”); (also referred to as a "second stop mode"), and (3) a stop mode (also referred to as a "third stop mode") in which the stop times (stop timings) of all symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). and (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the left and right symbols are stopped at approximately the same time and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and depending on the variation effect pattern selected (set) at S4505, it is determined in which stop mode the variable display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection/decision (setting) of the variable effect pattern also serves as the selection/decision (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection/decision (setting) of the variable effect pattern and the selection/decision (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The first stop symbol is also called "first stop symbol", the second stop symbol is also called "second stop symbol", and the third stop symbol is called "second stop symbol". This is also referred to as "third stop symbol" or "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is mainly in production mode C (state C), and the result of the second special symbol suitability determination is “small This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variable display is stopped when the variable display of the performance symbols 8 is performed based on the fact that the game is "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), mainly in (1) production modes A and B (state A), the result of the first special symbol suitability determination is "off" or "jackpot". When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed based on that, (2) in the production mode E (state B), the result of the first special design propriety determination is "out" or "jackpot". If the variation display of the production pattern 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as "reach variation") or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as "normal variation"), and (3) production mode C ( In the state C), when the variable display of the performance symbol 8 is performed with the reach variation or the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol propriety determination being "off" or "jackpot", the variation display. This is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping the

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly in (1) production modes A and B (state A), under circumstances where the function of shortening variation according to the number of special pending balls works (at the start of variation When the number of special figures 1 reserved balls is "3" or "4") and the result of the first special symbol propriety judgment is "out", and based on this, the variable display of the production symbol 8 is performed by normal variation , (2) when the production mode E (state B), when the fluctuation display of the production pattern 8 is performed by normal fluctuation based on the fact that the result of the first special design propriety determination is "out", and (3 ) In the production mode C (state C), when the variable display of the performance symbol 8 is performed by normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol propriety determination being “out”, the variable display is stopped. This is a stop mode that can be executed when

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols→middle symbol), mainly in the production mode C (state C), the result of the second special symbol propriety determination is "off" or "big hit". When the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed with the reach fluctuation based on it, and (2) when the production mode E (state B), the result of the first special design propriety determination is "off" or "jackpot". This is a stop mode that can be executed at the time of stopping the variable display when the variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed by the reach variation based on.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes when stopping the variable display of the performance symbols 8 are provided according to the performance mode (game state) and the variable display mode and result (stop display mode) based on the results of the special symbol propriety determination. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the stopping mode by varying it according to the game situation. Also, for the player, it is possible to guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derivative display) after that by paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped. It is also possible to guess the type of special game that can be executed, the presence or absence of execution, the possibility, etc. through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse expectations for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the above-described first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop mode (fifth stop mode) in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol→left symbol→middle symbol" ), and a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the left and middle symbols are stopped at approximately the same time and then the right symbol is stopped. The conditions under which the aspects are executed are not limited to the present embodiment, either, and can be set in various ways.

In addition, in this embodiment, the patterns "1" to "9" constituting the production pattern 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of pattern (design type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (production mode). Specifically, in state A (production modes A and B), "7" among the odd patterns is a red pattern (hereinafter also referred to as "red pattern"), and the other odd patterns "1" and "3". , “5” and “9” are green patterns (hereinafter also referred to as “green patterns”), and even number patterns “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” are blue patterns (hereinafter “blue patterns”). (Also called "pattern"). On the other hand, in states B and C (production modes C, D and E), red symbols are "3", "5" and "7" among the odd numbered symbols, and "1" and "9" which are odd numbered symbols other than these. are green symbols, and the even number symbols "2", "4", "6" and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence relationship between the pattern and the color shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be adopted. can be used. Also, in this embodiment, the symbol types (red, green, and blue symbols) are determined by color, but it is also possible to determine them by factors other than color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the production design, and the number design when there is a production design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the production design (number design) representing a number The symbol type may be determined by the character design, or the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd-numbered design and the even-numbered design.

The variable display of the production pattern 8 is performed, and the combination (stop display mode) of the production patterns 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above, The result of the variable display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic pattern combination (stop display mode), the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different patterns (numbers), and the production pattern is a "perfectly separated pattern" (such as "124"). 8L (left pattern) and the production pattern 8R (right pattern) are the same pattern (number), and the remaining production pattern 8C (middle pattern) is a different pattern (number) from the others. ) is set as an out mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of a winning game. On the other hand, "double eyes" ("777" etc.) in which the three production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same are used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game of 4R or more (see FIG. 6). there is

On the premise of such a basic pattern combination, in the present embodiment, the "reach loose pattern" among the loose patterns is also used for the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R jackpot game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won) than the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of the state B (high base state) in which it is difficult to acquire prize balls (increase in holding balls) in a small winning game compared to the low base state), that is, for the player This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (amount of profit). In addition, the "completely loose eye" among the loose eyes is also used as a small winning mode that triggers the execution of the small winning game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is open most of the time, so the small winning big winning port (the second opening) located downstream of the second starting port 21 This is because it is difficult to enter the ball into the big winning hole 35), and the possibility of obtaining a profit from a small hit is extremely low (extremely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to missing). Furthermore, the "specific loose eye" to be described later among the loose eye is set as a small winning mode that triggers the execution of the small winning game (small winning of the second special symbol) in the state C (high-probability-low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific loose eyes) is also referred to as "first display mode", the big hit mode (double eyes) is also referred to as "second display mode", and the off mode (complete loose eyes, reach rose) The order of the order of the order) is also referred to as the "third display mode", and the complete order of the detachment mode (completely isolated order, the extended order) is also referred to as the "fourth display mode".

In addition, the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state based on performing a left-handed game, so the first special symbol propriety determination (first 1 special symbol variable display) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol propriety determination (second special symbol variable display) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol propriety determination is made under such circumstances, the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect display device 102 changes. Only display (and stop display) is performed. Similarly, state B (high base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, and is mainly based on the entry ball into the second start port 21. Since it is rare that the second special symbol validity judgment (variation display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, such a situation When the second special symbol propriety determination is performed below, the variable display of the corresponding production pattern 8 is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variable display by the production display 102 ( and stop display).

Similarly, state C (high-probability-low base state) is a gaming state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, so the second special symbol propriety determination ( Second special symbol variation display) is performed, and it is rare that the first special symbol validity determination (first special symbol variation display) is performed during the second special symbol variation display. When the first special symbol propriety determination is made under such a situation, the effect display device 102 does not perform the variable display of the corresponding effect symbol 8 on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Only variable display (and stop display) is performed.

However, if the special symbol right or wrong judgment is made against the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) and the judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol right or wrong judgment is made When the game is played and a big win is achieved), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 displays a performance display suggesting the occurrence of the big win. conduct. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to let the player know that the result of the variable display of the special symbols to be played is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big win, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big win, thereby missing an opportunity to obtain a profit.

[Other aspects]
In addition, in the first embodiment described above, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the high-probability-high base state, the high-probability-high base state continues until the next big hit occurs. Instead of such a big hit type, or in addition to such a big hit type, when the game state after the big win game is set to a high probability high base state, a predetermined number of times in the high probability high base state A jackpot type may be provided in which the game state changes to a high-probability-low base state when a jackpot is not achieved until the variable display of (50 or 100) special symbols is completed. By providing such a jackpot type, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-base state, and when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times in the high-base state, depending on the jackpot type, after that has a case of shifting to a low-probability-low base state, a case of continuing a high-probability-high base state, and a case of shifting to a high-probability-low base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the changing modes (transition modes) of the game state, enhance the game playability, and enhance the game interest. Further, in a high base state from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of the variable display of the special symbols for the predetermined number of times, the variable display of the special symbols for the predetermined number of times is performed by executing the common game performance. is executed, it can be difficult for the player to recognize which game state to shift to. As a result, the player's interest in the game in the high base state is heightened, and the player's expectation for an advantageous state is heightened. Moreover, even if the game state after the big win game is finished is not the high-probability-low base state but the high-probability-low base state, it is changed to the high-probability-low base state after the predetermined number of fluctuations. It is possible to play the game expecting to. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the amusement of the game for a long period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, the first special symbol indicator (the first special symbol indicator 41a and the second special symbol indicator 41b) and the second special symbol indicator (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 ) are all controlled by the main controller. In this manner, the display control of the first special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) is performed by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display device (variation The display of c1 and c2) of the status indicator 49 may be controlled by another controller such as a sub-controller. As a result, even if display control by one control unit fails, correct game information can be notified as long as the display control by the other control unit is appropriate. Also, the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are both provided on the same display unit (main display 40). As a result, the first special symbol display device controlled by the main control unit and the second special symbol display device controlled by the sub-control unit are provided close to each other, and the matching of the display contents of both can be confirmed, and the display control is performed. It is possible to easily check whether there is any problem in the

Similarly, in the first embodiment, both the first normal symbol display device (normal symbol display device 42) and the second normal symbol display device (c3 of the fluctuation state display device 49) are displayed and controlled by the main control unit. It was assumed that In such a mode, the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. As a result, the same effects as those of the special symbol display device described above can be obtained.

Also, in addition to the second special symbol indicator and the second normal symbol indicator, the second first special symbol pending indicator, the second second special symbol pending indicator, the second normal symbol not shown A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the main control of the first special figure reservation indicator (first special figure reservation indicator 43a, second special figure reservation indicator 43b), second general figure reservation indicator (universal figure reservation indicator 42) The display is controlled by the unit, and the second special figure reservation display (first special figure reservation display, second special figure reservation display), second general figure reservation display is controlled by other control units such as sub control units may be controlled by In addition, these are the first special figure reservation indicator (first special figure reservation indicator 43a, second special figure reservation indicator 43b), first general figure reservation indicator (universal figure reservation indicator 42), second 2 special figure suspension display (second first special figure suspension display, second second special figure suspension display), second general figure suspension display can be provided in the same main display 40 can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of both, to easily confirm the consistency of the display contents, and to easily confirm whether or not there is any problem in the display control.

In addition, the first special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator 41a and second special symbol indicator 41b), the first normal symbol indicator (normal symbol indicator 42), the first special symbol reservation indicator (First special figure reservation indicator 43a, second special figure reservation indicator 43b), first general figure reservation indicator (universal figure reservation indicator 42), second special symbol indicator (fluctuation state indicator 49 c1 and c2), second normal symbol indicator (c3 of fluctuation state indicator 49), second special figure pending indicator (second first special figure pending indicator, second second special figure hold display) and the second normal drawing hold display may all be provided in the same main display 40. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of these display units and to easily check whether there is any problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub-control. Also, the main display 40 can be provided outside (outside) the game area 3 . Also, it can be provided on the game board 2 outside (outside) the game area 3 .

In addition, if there is a power cut (power cut processing) for some reason during the game or during the operation of the game machine (during the power ON), when the power is supplied again, the first display controlled by the main control unit The special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator 41a and second special symbol indicator 41b), first normal symbol indicator (normal symbol indicator 42), first special symbol reservation indicator (first special Figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) executes display (display control) first (resume, return) , 2nd special symbol indicator (c1 and c2 of fluctuation state indicator 49) whose display is controlled by the sub control unit, 2nd normal symbol indicator (c3 of fluctuation state indicator 49), 2nd special figure Holding indicator (second first special figure holding indicator, second second special figure holding indicator), second general figure holding indicator later display (display control) Execute (resume, return) .

However, the second special symbol indicator (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second normal symbol indicator (c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second special symbol display controlled by the sub control unit The figure holding display (second first special figure holding display, second second special figure holding display) and second general figure holding display are also image display devices whose display is controlled by the sub control unit Display (display control) is executed (resume, return) first from (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and/or the third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display turns on/off/blinks a single LED, while the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, or/and the second This is because the three-image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display section and has more complicated display control than the main display.

As a result, even if it is a display unit that shows the special symbol propriety determination result and the fluctuation state controlled by the same sub-control unit, after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored), the first sub-display unit that quickly restores the display. , and a second sub-display unit that restores the display after a delay. And it becomes possible to perform optimal game control by each role. In addition, the first sub-display unit includes a second special symbol indicator (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), a second normal symbol indicator (variation state indicator 49 c3), the second special figure holding indicator (second first special figure holding indicator, second second special figure holding indicator), second general figure holding indicator, simple The display control makes it possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state, etc., and to perform a quick recovery after the power is turned on again. The second sub-display unit corresponds to an image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and/or the third image display device 72) whose display is similarly controlled by the sub-control unit. However, complex display control is used to display various game information and game effects (reach effects, advance notice effects, story effects, etc.), and it is possible to improve interest through various game effects.

Further, in still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cut processing) for some reason during the game or while the game machine is in operation (while the power is ON), when the power is supplied again, the sub control unit Display-controlled second special symbol indicator (fluctuation state indicator 49 c1 and c2), second normal symbol indicator (fluctuation state indicator 49 c3), second special symbol pending indicator (second 2 1st special figure reservation display, 2nd 2nd special figure reservation display), 2nd general figure reservation display first executes display (display control) (resume, return), main control unit 1st special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator 41a and second special symbol indicator 41b), first normal symbol indicator (normal symbol indicator 42), first special symbol Hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold display 42) later display (display control) execution (resume , return), and the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, or/and the third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit further displays (display control ) may be executed (resume, return).

Next, Example 2 of the present invention will be described. The second embodiment shows an embodiment of effects that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment described above and a configuration related to control of the effects. In the following, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted. In the following description, the same reference numerals, step numbers, and the like as in the first embodiment are used for configurations different from those in the first embodiment, and the same reference numerals, step numbers, and the like as in the first embodiment are used for common configurations.

Incidentally, the various effects described in the second embodiment are, as described in the first embodiment, the control processing (received command analysis processing (S4302), variable effect It is realized by start processing (S4404), winning game effect processing (S4408), etc.). Therefore, the sub-control section 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) is also called "effect execution means" or "effect control means". In addition, in the second embodiment, the high base state (low probability high base state and high probability high base state, namely state B) in the first embodiment described above is also referred to as "first gaming state", and the low probability The high base state (state B) is also referred to as "low probability and first game state", and the high probability high base state (state B) is also referred to as "high probability and first game state", high probability low base The state (state C) is also referred to as a “second game state” or a “small hit frequent state”. These things are the same also about Example 3 and Example 4 mentioned later.

[RTC function]
As shown in FIG. 53, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) 92 is mounted on the sub-control board 90 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. The block diagram of the sub-control board 90 shown in FIG. 53 replaces the sub-control board 90 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

The RTC 92 corresponds to timekeeping means capable of measuring the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 92 operates on the power supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 from a predetermined island power supply (not shown), and operates on the power supply board 109 when power is not supplied from the island power supply. It operates by power (backup power supply) supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) provided in the . Therefore, the RTC 92 can measure and output the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not powered on (when power supply is stopped). Even if the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are erased (so-called RAM clear), the RTC 92 can measure and output the current date and time without being affected by it. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 92 may be provided on the sub-control board 90 . As the backup power supply circuit, for example, a circuit including a capacitor or an internal battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted.

The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90, as shown in FIG. 54, executes the special effect related process (S4301) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010). The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 54 replaces the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. In the second embodiment, the special effect-related processing (S4301) makes it possible to execute a special effect based on the result of timing by the RTC 92 (RTC function). The special effect related processing (S4301) will be described below.

[Special effect-related processing]
As shown in FIG. 58, in the special effect related process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not the special effect execution flag is OFF (S5001). The special effect execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being executed, in other words, it is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being executed. When the special performance is not executed (when not during the special performance period), the special performance execution flag is turned OFF, and when the special performance is executed (when the special performance is in progress), the special performance execution flag is set. is turned ON. This special effect execution flag is turned ON by the processing of S5003 described later accompanying the start of the special effect, and is turned OFF when the special effect execution time (performance time) elapses and the special effect (special effect period) ends. be.

If it is determined in S5001 that the special effect execution flag is not OFF (it is ON) (NO in S5001), this process ends without performing the processes after S5002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special effect execution flag is OFF (YES in S5001), it is determined whether or not the current time clocked by the RTC 92 is the start time of the special effect (S5002). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect based on the result of timekeeping by the RTC 92 described above. That is, the special effect is executed based on the result of timing by the RTC 92 regardless of the result of the determination of whether the special symbol is appropriate (special pattern variation pattern), and the time measured by the RTC 92 is set in advance. When (predetermined time) comes, it is started. In S5002, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time (start time) at which the special effect is to be started by referring to the clocking status of the RTC 92 .

Here, in this embodiment, the predetermined time (start time), which is the execution condition (start condition) of the special effect, is set every hour from 10:00:00 to 22:00:00. ing. Therefore, the special effect is executed every hour (periodically) starting at 10:00:00 every day. A special effect that is periodically executed in this way is also called an “RTC effect”.

In S5002, if it is determined that the current time is the start time of the special effect (YES in S5002), turn on the special effect execution flag (S5003), a special effect start command that specifies the start (execution) of the special effect is set in the sub output buffer (S5004). When this special effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-described command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 transmits image data corresponding to the special effect pattern specified based on the special effect start command. The image data is read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a special effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen of the image display device. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 executes output control of sound effects (production sounds) and lighting control of various lamps in accordance with image display (display production) relating to the special production. On the other hand, in S5002, when it is determined that the current time is not the start time of the special effect (NO in S5002), the process ends without performing the processes after S5003.

In this embodiment, the special effect is set to be executed (started) every hour, but the interval (period) at which the special effect is executed can be arbitrarily set (selected) on the gaming hall side. You may do so. For example, a setting switch (not shown) is provided on the sub-control board 90, and the execution interval (cycle) is set to a predetermined time (for example, one of "1 hour", "2 hours" and "3 hours") by operating the switch. It can be configured to be settable (cycle setting means). As a result, when a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are installed in the game hall, it is possible for the game hall to arbitrarily set the environment in which the special effects are simultaneously executed on the plurality of pachinko game machines 1.例文帳に追加becomes. It should be noted that such a cycle setting can be performed not only by operating a switch on the sub-control board 90 but also by operating a performance button provided on the front frame 51 . In this case, a cycle setting screen that can be activated by a person other than the player, such as a store clerk or manager of the game hall, performing a predetermined input operation is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the period can be set by operating the effect button according to the screen. It is desirable to prevent the player from setting the execution cycle of such a special effect. This is to prevent the execution interval of the special effect from being changed without permission.

[Special production (RTC production)]
Next, a special effect (RTC effect) that can be executed by the above-described special effect related processing (S4301) will be described. The special effect (RTC effect) of the present embodiment is mainly provided on the left and right sides of the front frame 51 with the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (also referred to as "sub-liquid crystals") and the game area. 3 and a speaker 67, and the main effect corresponding to the main effect and its main effect. It is configured including a preceding effect that is performed prior to.

Image data corresponding to the main effect (also referred to as “main effect image data”) and image data corresponding to the preceding effect (also referred to as “preceding effect image data”) are stored in the ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100. It is In addition, the ROM of the sub control board 90 stores sound data corresponding to the main effect (also referred to as "main effect sound data") and sound data corresponding to the preceding effect (also referred to as "preceding effect sound data"). there is When the condition for executing the special effect is satisfied based on the result of timing by the RTC 92, the data is read out, and the effect image related to the preceding effect and the main effect is displayed on the image display device, and the preceding effect and the main effect are displayed. is output from the speaker. As a result, a special effect is executed.

One or both of the main effect image data and the preceding effect image data may be referred to as "special effect image data", and either one or both of the main effect sound data and the preceding effect sound data may be referred to as "special effect image data". Also called "acoustic data". In addition, the effect image corresponding to the main effect is also called "main effect image", and the image corresponding to the preceding effect is also called "preceding effect image", and either one or both of the main effect image and the preceding effect image is also referred to as a "special effect image". Furthermore, the sound effect corresponding to the main production is also called "main production sound", and the sound effect corresponding to the preceding production is also called "preceding production sound", and either the main production sound or the preceding production sound or Both are referred to as "special effect sound".

Here, the special effect is produced based on the content corresponding to the model equipped with the RTC function, and the content is suitable to be executed periodically regardless of the result of the special symbol propriety determination. . Cartoons, anime, movies, dramas, musicians, etc. can be exemplified as the subject matter (contents) of the special presentation. In this embodiment, a plurality of special effects (special effect patterns) are provided, and each time the RTC 92 counts a predetermined time (every hour in this example), the plurality of special effects (special effect patterns) are performed. They are executed one by one from among them. Specifically, in this embodiment, there are 20 types of special effect patterns 1 to 20, each of which has a different main effect. For example, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a model whose theme is a predetermined serial drama, and the special effect is according to the theme, the main effect of the special effect (special effect 1) based on the special effect pattern 1 is the first. The content of the effect is determined such that the main effect of the special effect (special effect 2) based on the story and the special effect pattern 2 is the second episode.

On the other hand, the contents of the preceding performances constituting the special performance are common to the special performance patterns 1 to 20 (special performances 1 to 20). The preceding effect of the present embodiment is an effect (countdown effect) in which the remaining period until the start of the main effect is counted down. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), a number image 200 (countdown image) consisting of a one-digit number representing the remaining time (number of seconds) until the start of the main effect is displayed on the display screen of the first symbol display device 7. A preceding effect (countdown effect) is executed by displaying the number approximately in the center of 7a and counting down the number one by one. In this embodiment, a countdown effect (preceding effect) is executed from about 5 seconds before the start of the main effect, and the numbers of the number image 200 are counted down one by one from "5". Then, when the number indicated by the number image 200 becomes "0" (zero), the countdown effect ends, followed by the start of the main effect (see FIG. 56(b)).

In the main effect, for example, in the case of a special effect of a model whose theme is a serial drama as described above, the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) as a sub liquid crystal displays a number of episodes such as "Episode XX". An image (main effect image) indicating the number of episodes is displayed, and an image (main effect image) indicating the title corresponding to the number of episodes is displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) also serving as a sub liquid crystal. The first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) as the main liquid crystal is displayed, and a drama image (main effect image) is displayed in accordance with the story (synopsis) corresponding to the number of episodes (title). (See FIG. 56(b)). While the main production is being performed, the speaker 67 outputs background music (BGM) such as the theme song and insert songs of the drama.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the time measured by the RTC 92 reaches the predetermined time and the special effect is executed, first, the countdown effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (see FIG. 56(a)). ), following the end of the countdown effect, the main effect is executed on the display screens 71a and 72a of the left and right sub liquid crystals and the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (see FIG. 56(b)). Note that the countdown effect indicating the remaining period until the start of the main effect, which is executed as the preceding effect, may not be based on the number image 200 as in the present embodiment. A timer image in which the number of seconds is displayed to 1/100 second and displayed as a countdown may be used. In addition to the countdown effect, the preceding effect can be, for example, a effect that indicates the time until the start of the main effect by counting up numbers or time (count-up effect), or introduces the contents of the main effect that will start from now on. Any mode can be used as long as it can be an effect (introduction effect), and the player can recognize that the main effect will start.

In this embodiment, the special effects (special effects 1 to 20) based on the special effect patterns 1 to 20 described above are executed in order from the smallest pattern number every hour (predetermined period). That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is operated (turned on) for the first time after it is installed in the game hall and the first execution condition (time condition) is established, the special performance 1 is executed, and thereafter, the special performance 2, It is executed in the order of the special production 3. Then, when the special performance 20 is executed, it returns to the special performance 1, and thereafter the special performances 1 to 20 are looped and executed. The effect time (execution time) of the special effect is determined according to the special effect pattern, and in this embodiment, the effect time for one time is approximately 5 to 6 minutes. Therefore, a special performance execution period (also referred to as a “special performance period”) of about 5 to 6 minutes occurs every hour (predetermined period). As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the players in the game hall and the players playing the game machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the normal production state in which the special production is not executed, that is, outside the execution period of the special production (also referred to as "normal production period"), information on the special production (main production) to be executed in the next cycle is provided. It is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal (not shown). In this case, the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal functions as an information display section for displaying information regarding the next special effect (main effect). In this embodiment, as information about the special effect (main effect), the remaining time until the time measured by the RTC 92 becomes the next start time, that is, the remaining time until the next special effect is executed (started). The time and the content of the next special performance (main performance) are displayed. The remaining time can be displayed by a timer that counts down the time in the display format of, for example, "○ hours XX minutes XX seconds" (○ is any value from "0" to "9"). Also, the content of the next special effect (main effect) can be the number of episodes and the title of the next special effect (main effect), such as "Episode XX: □□□□".

In this embodiment, the information on the next special effect (in this example, the remaining time and the content of the main effect) is the countdown effect that is executed when the time clocked by the RTC 92 next reaches a predetermined time (start time). is displayed until the At this time, the countdown ("5"→"4"→"3"→"2"→"1"→"0") of the number image 200 displayed in the countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal. The display control is performed so that the countdown of the remaining time (“0 hours 00 minutes 05 seconds” to “0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds”) coincides. As a result, the countdown effect (countdown display of the number image 200) executed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) and the countdown display of the remaining time displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) can be linked. , it is possible to start a special effect (main effect) without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to a discrepancy (mismatch) in the countdown display (remaining time).

As described above, the execution interval (cycle) of the special effect can be arbitrarily set (selected) to any one of "1 hour", "2 hours" and "3 hours" (predetermined time) on the gaming hall side. In this case, the special effect (RTC effect) is executed (started) according to the set execution interval (period). Also, a special effect period is generated according to the set execution interval (period). Further, information (remaining time, etc.) relating to a special effect (main effect) to be executed in the next cycle according to the set execution interval (cycle) is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 sends information about the execution status of the special effect, such as the latest special effect executed based on the result of timing by the RTC 92 and the content (type) of the special effect to be executed next. The information is stored in the RAM of the control board 90, and the information is to be backed up (backup data) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. For this reason, for example, if the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off at the end of the day's business while the special effects 1 to 10 are executed, the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on (starts operation) on the next business day. When the first execution condition (time condition) is established, the special performance 11 is executed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the execution order of the special effects, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the execution order being disturbed by the game machine (installation table) installed in the game hall.

Furthermore, the special effect may not consist of the preceding effect and the main effect, and may consist of only the main effect, for example. In addition, the configuration of the special effect is arbitrary, such as providing multiple preceding effects such as performing a further predetermined preceding effect before the preceding effect, providing multiple main effects, and performing a predetermined post-effect after the main effect. is.

Here, the pachinko game machine 1, as described in the first embodiment, based on various commands transmitted from the main control unit 80, various An effect (game effect) is executed. The effect is mainly executed in a manner corresponding to the state of the gaming machine (game state). The game state is controlled by the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) (state control means). (standby state), a variable game state in which the variable display of identification information is performed, and a winning game state in which a winning game is performed. Furthermore, the variable gaming state includes the aforementioned state A (low-probability base state), state B (low-probability-high base state, high-probability-high base state) and state C (high-probability-low base state). Among these game states, the state A is a basic game state (normal game state), and if a big win is won in this state A, the big win game state becomes possible to execute the big win game. Then, depending on the type (type) of the big win, the game state after the big win game becomes state B or state C, which is more advantageous than state A for the player. In this pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled in each game state, the execution mode of the special effect executed based on the result of timing by the RTC 92 differs according to the game state.

That is, as described above, the special effect consists of a preceding effect (countdown effect) and a main effect. 56(a), a countdown effect is first executed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), and then the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a) and the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) star. output is executed (FIG. 56(b)). The reason why the special effect (preceding effect and main effect) is executed using the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal is that the execution conditions are satisfied (when the time measured by the RTC 92 is equal to the predetermined time). ) is controlled to the aforementioned customer waiting state or state A.

On the other hand, when the game state when the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied is controlled to the above-mentioned jackpot game state, state B or state C, that is, when compared with the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player. When being controlled to a game state (also referred to as a "special game state"), the special effect is not executed on the main liquid crystal, but is executed only on the sub liquid crystal. That is, the effect image (special effect image) relating to the preceding effect and the main effect is not displayed on the main liquid crystal, and the special effect image is displayed only on the sub liquid crystal. This is because, in the special game state, an effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) corresponding to the special game state is displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a). For example, in the big win game state, a round effect image is displayed, in state B, a special effect image (effect pattern, effect suspension, background image, etc.) dedicated to the high base state is displayed, and in state C, a special effect image including during the small win game is displayed. A production image (production pattern, production suspension, background image, etc.) is displayed. In this way, in the special game state, since a special effect corresponding to the special game state is executed, if the special effect is further executed on a large scale under such a situation, the effect becomes too lively, and the game is actually played. There is a risk of losing interest. In addition, since the big win game state, state B, and state C do not occur unless conditions (predetermined game conditions) such as winning a big win are met, the player can experience the special effects executed in these game states. Opportunities can be said to be difficult to obtain as compared to special effects that are performed periodically (regularly). In view of this, when the game state is controlled to the customer waiting state or state A when the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied (when not in the special game state), as shown in FIG. A special effect image is displayed to execute a special effect, and when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, state B or state C (when it is in the special game state), as shown in FIG. 57(a). , a special effect image is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal to execute the special effect. As a result, it is possible to appropriately display the special effect image related to the special effect according to the game state, and even if the special effect is executed in the special game state, the effect corresponding to the special game state is possible. It is possible to display the special effect image without hindering the visibility of the image.

Concretely, when the special effect is executed while being controlled to the special game state (jackpot game state, state B or state C), that is, when the special effect image is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal, FIG. , (b), the special effect image (preceding effect image, main effect image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal is reduced and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57(a), two left and right sub liquid crystals are provided, and a reduced special effect image is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal. Therefore, when the conditions for executing the special effect are satisfied while being controlled to the jackpot game state, state B or state C, the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (and the display screen 71a of the left sub-liquid crystal) shows the game state at that time. With the corresponding effect image displayed, the countdown image is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal, followed by the main effect image. At this time, the main effect image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is the same as the main effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) when the special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or state A. A reduced version. Therefore, for example, when the special effect is based on a serial drama as described above, the drama image is displayed smaller than when it is displayed on the main liquid crystal. Further, in this embodiment, when a special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or state A, the "image showing the number of episodes" displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal (display screen 71a) and the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) ' and 'Image showing title' (see FIG. 56(b)) are also displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (see FIG. 57(a)).

Also, when displaying a special effect image on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the special game state, as shown in FIG. is provided in a part of the display screen 72a, and the main effect image can be displayed in a reduced size on the display portion S. That is, the special effect image can be displayed like a so-called "wipe screen". In the special game state, not only the main liquid crystal but also the sub liquid crystal may display an effect image corresponding to the special game state, so that the display of the effect image is not disturbed.

It should be noted that the special effect image is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the special game state because the jackpot game state, state B and state C are both right-handed states in which the game is played with the right hand. This is because the player's consciousness tends to be directed to the right side of the game board center. Also, a display portion S (reduced display portion) for displaying a special effect image in a reduced size may be provided, for example, in a portion (for example, lower right portion) of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal.

[Notice production]
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first notice effect, the second notice effect and the third notice effect are used as the notice effect related to the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the special symbol and/or the effect symbol). It has a performance. The first notice effect is a suggestion (suggestion effect) of the possibility (jackpot reliability) that the display result of the variable display currently being executed will be a big hit mode (specific display result), and the second notice effect is the present It suggests that the reliability of the variable display being executed is high (high expectation performance), and in the third advance notice performance, the display result of the variable display currently being executed is a big win mode (specific display result). It is something that suggests (specific suggestion production). These first notice effect, second notice effect, and third notice effect are all notice effects related to the variable display currently being executed (also referred to as "the relevant change"), and the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above. It is a kind of "notice of change" that can be executed based on Incidentally, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect can all be included in the variable effect pattern set in S4505 described above.

In this embodiment, out of the first notice effect, the second notice effect and the third notice effect, the first notice effect can be executed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low probability/low base state). Yes, and is not executed when controlled to state B (high base state) and when controlled to state C (high probability low base state). On the other hand, the second notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in all game states of state A (low-probability-low base state), state B (high-probability-low base state) and state C (high-probability-low base state). . That is, there is a possibility that the first notice effect will be executed in the effect mode A or B, and there is no possibility that it will be executed in the other effect modes. On the other hand, the second notice effect and the third notice effect may be executed in any of the effect modes A to E.

The first notice effect is executed by displaying a suggestive image suggesting the level of the reliability of the big hit on a predetermined display screen, and the display mode (display content) of the suggestive image is one step according to a predetermined order. It can change in stages from 1 to 2 (also referred to as "step production"). In this embodiment, the display mode of the suggestive image can be changed up to the third stage. At the beginning of the first notice performance, the suggestive image is displayed in the display mode of the first stage, and the display mode of the suggestive image changes step by step, and the higher the stage, the higher the reliability of the big win. ing. Therefore, in the first notice effect, there are a low-reliability pattern that ends in the first stage, a medium-reliability pattern that progresses to the second stage and ends, and a high-reliability pattern that progresses to the third stage and ends. One of these patterns is set in S4506 described above when the first notice effect is to be executed. In addition, the step performance as the first notice performance may be one that can change up to two stages or four or more stages, and the number of stages is appropriately determined according to the performance time (performance time) of the variable performance. can be done.

In addition, the first notice effect is executed outside the execution period of the special effect (RTC effect) described above (when the special effect period does not occur), and during the execution period of the special effect (when the special effect period occurs). The execution mode (display mode) differs depending on whether it is executed when the program is running or not. That is, when the first notice effect is executed outside the execution period of the special effect, the first notice effect is generated by one main liquid crystal from two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72). (first image display device 7) to display and execute a first suggestive image that can be displayed, and the display mode of the first suggestive image can change from the first stage to the third stage. It's becoming On the other hand, when the first notice effect is executed during the execution period of the special effect, the first notice effect is performed by one sub liquid crystal (the second image display device 71 or the third image display device 72) and the main liquid crystal. The display mode of the two second suggestive images can be changed from the first stage to the third stage.

Therefore, when the first notice effect is executed, the pattern of the first notice effect (also referred to as "first notice effect pattern") corresponding to whether or not the special effect is executed (execution status) at that time is changed to S4506 described above. is set by That is, the low-reliability pattern, the medium-reliability pattern, and the high-reliability pattern described above are preliminarily provided with patterns corresponding to outside the execution period of the special performance and patterns corresponding to the execution period of the special performance. Any one of these patterns is set according to the situation when the first announcement effect is executed. The first notice effect executed outside the execution period of the special effect is also referred to as "normal first notice effect", and the first notice effect executed during the special effect execution period is referred to as "special first notice effect". It is also called "forecast performance".

Here, FIG. 60 shows an example of a table (first notice effect determination table) referred to when determining the first notice effect pattern set in S4506. As shown in the figure, the first notice effect determination table sets the first notice effect pattern to "first stage (low reliability)", " The data structure is such that it is possible to determine either one of "first→second stage (medium reliability)" and "first→second→third stage (high reliability)". Specifically, for each variation pattern of the special symbol accompanying the execution of the first notice effect, the random number for determining the notice effect is assigned according to the determination type of the first notice effect pattern. In this embodiment, since the random number range of the random number for determining the announcement effect is set to "0 to 99", the random number value (judgment data) is assigned within the range of "0 to 99".

FIG. 60(a) is a table to be referred to when the first notice effect is executed with the big hit variation when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is the big hit. Also, FIG. 60(b) is a table to be referred to when the first notice effect is executed in the deviation variation when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a deviation. It should be noted that the first notice effect pattern is determined according to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination. This is because it is a game state in which the variable display of 1 special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol propriety determination is executed in the state A, the first notice effect is not executed (unexecutable) based on the judgment result.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is a big hit and the first notice effect is executed with the big hit variation, the first notice effect ends at the first stage Low reliability No pattern is selected, and a medium-reliability pattern that advances to two stages and finishes or a high-reliability pattern that advances to three stages and finishes is selected. Further, the possibility (selection rate) of selecting the high reliability pattern (1 stage→2 stages→3 stages) is higher than the medium reliability pattern (1 stage→2 stages). Further, when the first notice effect is executed with the variation of the big hit, the middle reliability pattern or the high reliability pattern is selected when the variation pattern is "P1". This is a relatively long variation time of 120 seconds for the variation pattern “P1” (see FIG. 9), and the time required to change the display mode of the suggestive image (the first suggestive image or the second suggestive image) by two steps or more. can be ensured, and the display mode of the first suggestive image can be changed without difficulty.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60(b), when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is out and the first notice effect is executed with the out variation, the low reliability pattern (1 step) is selected most. After that, the selection rate becomes lower (difficult to select) in the order of the medium reliability pattern (1 stage→2 stages) and the high reliability pattern (1 stage→2 stages→3 stages). Further, when the first notice effect is executed with the deviation variation, when the variation pattern is "P6" or "P10", the medium reliability pattern and the high reliability pattern are not selected, and only the low reliability pattern is selected. When it is "P5" or "P9", the high reliability pattern is not selected and the low reliability pattern or medium reliability pattern is selected, and "P4" or "P8" is selected. , a low-reliability pattern, medium-reliability pattern, or high-reliability pattern is selected. This is because, in the case of the fluctuation patterns “P6” and “P10”, since the fluctuation time is 30 seconds (see FIG. 9), the medium reliability pattern (1 stage → 2 stages) and the high reliability pattern (1 stage → 2 stages → 3 stages) It is difficult to perform the first notice effect, and in the case of the variation patterns “P5” and “P9”, the variation time is 45 seconds (see FIG. 9). This is because it is difficult to perform the first announcement effect by the high reliability pattern (1 step→2 steps→3 steps). In addition, in the case of the fluctuation patterns “P4” and “P8”, since the fluctuation time is 120 seconds like the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern “P1” (see FIG. 9), the low reliability pattern (1 step), medium reliability This is because it is possible to safely change the display mode of the suggestive image for both the degree pattern (1 step→2 steps) and the high reliability pattern (1 step→2 steps→3 steps).

In addition, in the deviation fluctuation, the first notice effect can be executed when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, and the fluctuation pattern "P7" (variation time 12 seconds) and " P11" (fluctuation time of 4 seconds), the first announcement effect is not executed. This is because the execution time of the first notice effect cannot be sufficiently secured.

In this embodiment, the first notice effect (normal first notice effect) is executed outside the special effect execution period (normal effect period), and the first notice effect is executed during the special effect execution period (special effect period). The same first notice effect determination table is used when executing the notice effect (special first notice effect). Then, the image data for the first notice effect is read according to whether the special effect is executed (normal effect period or special effect period) when the first notice effect is executed, and the first notice effect (normal (first notice effect or special first notice effect) is executed. However, the first notice effect determination table can be made different between the normal effect period and the special effect period. That is, a first notice effect determination table for the normal effect period and a first notice effect determination table for the special effect period are provided, and whether or not the special effect is executed when the first notice effect is executed (normal effect period or special effect period) A table to be referred to may be set according to the effect period). When the tables are provided separately in this way, it is possible to make the rate of appearance (appearance mode) of the first notice effect pattern different between the normal effect period and the special effect period, so that the appearance mode of the first notice effect can be varied. It becomes possible to

Here, the execution mode (performance mode) of the normal first notice effect and the special first notice effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 58, the normal first notice effect is executed by displaying an effect image 300 simulating a shooting star (also referred to as "shooting star image 300") as a first suggestive image. As described above, the execution mode (first notice effect pattern) of the first notice effect includes a low reliability pattern in which the first notice effect ends in the first stage, and a medium reliability pattern in which the first notice effect ends in two stages. and a high-reliability pattern that advances to three stages and ends. Correspondingly, the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestive image) includes a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first display mode) and a display mode corresponding to the second stage (second display mode). mode) and a display mode corresponding to the third stage (third display mode) are provided. In FIG. 58, the upper stage is the first stage, the middle stage is the second stage, and the lower stage is the third stage.

Normally, in the first notice effect, from the sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) on the left and right sides outside the game area to the main liquid crystal (first image display device) in the approximate center of the board surface within the game area 7) A shooting star image 300 is used to display a shooting star flying toward it. That is, in the first stage (first display mode) of the normal first notice effect, as shown in the upper part of FIG. The shooting star image 300 is not displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a).

In the second stage (second display mode) of the normal first notice effect, as shown in the middle stage of FIG. 58, shooting star images 300 depicting more shooting stars than in the first stage are displayed on the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a). ), and the shooting star image 300 is displayed in such a manner that it moves (flows) to both the left and right sides on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal.

In the third stage (third display mode) of the normal first notice effect, as shown in the lower part of FIG. ), and the shooting star image 300 is displayed in a flying (flowing) manner over substantially the entire display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal.

In this way, the display locations (display positions) of the shooting star image 300 relating to the normal first notice effect are substantially the entirety of the left and right sub-liquid crystal display screens 71a and 72a and part of the central main liquid crystal display screen 7a ( left and right sides) or substantially all over. The display location (display position) of the shooting star image 300 is also referred to as a “first display portion”.

In this embodiment, when the normal first notice effect is performed in two or more stages, that is, when the normal first notice effect is performed by the medium reliability pattern or the high reliability pattern, the normal first notice effect is a so-called "pseudo It is executed along with the variable performance by “continuous”. Pseudo-continuous (pseudo-continuous effect) is a temporary stop (temporary stop) in a stop display mode (predetermined loose stitch) other than double stitches after the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable display during one variable display of the special symbol. , and after that, the action of displaying the performance pattern 8 again in a variable manner is repeated a predetermined number of times. A shooting star image 300 (first suggestive image) at each stage is displayed from the start of each variable display that constitutes the pseudo run until the first stop symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped).

Specifically, for example, as a variable effect based on a pseudo-continuous effect pattern, after the start of the variable display of the effect pattern 8, the first (first) temporary stop is performed, followed by the second variable display (pseudo 2) is performed, the second temporary stop is performed, and then the third variation display (pseudo 3) is performed. When the first notice effect is performed, the shooting star image 300 is displayed in the first stage display mode from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 until the first (first) temporary stop is performed (upper part of FIG. 58), and a pseudo The shooting star image 300 is displayed in the second stage display mode from the start of 2 until the second temporary stop is performed (the middle part of FIG. 58), and a predetermined time (for example, when reach is established or a predetermined The shooting star image 300 is displayed in the third stage display mode until the performance execution time) (lower stage in FIG. 58). As described above, in this embodiment, when the normal first notice effect is performed in two stages or more, the normal first notice effect is executed along with the pseudo-continuation variable effect. Usually, the stage of the first notice production is going up. Combining such a pseudo-continuation with the normal first notice effect makes it possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the normal first notice effect (ending at the first stage) by the low reliability pattern is executed with the variable effect of the pseudo-continued, and with the variable effect that is not pseudo-continuous (non-quasi-continuous effect). There may be either one or both of the cases where the Also, in this embodiment, two or more stages of normal first notice effects are executed along with the pseudo-continuous variable effects. may be executed. In this case, for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the production pattern to the stop (temporary stop) of the first stop pattern, a plurality of productions from the first stage production to the multiple stage productions are performed according to a predetermined order. A normal first notice effect can be executed as a "step-up notice effect" executed step by step. In addition, in addition to the mode in which the display mode of the shooting star image 300 is changed step by step, the normal execution mode (effect mode) of the first notice effect is, for example, from the sub liquid crystal to the main liquid crystal as the first suggestive image ( A background image that can be displayed across) is provided, and the stage (progress) of the first announcement effect is usually indicated by the color change of the background image (for example, blue → green → red, etc.), and the background image can be further moved and displayed. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the stage (progress) of the normal first notice effect is indicated by the amount of movement (proportion of the display screen of the main liquid crystal). Alternatively, a character or item corresponding to the stage of the first notice effect is normally determined in advance, and a specific image (specific image) showing the character or item may be displayed on the image display device as the first suggestive image. good.

As described above, when the normal first notice effect is performed up to the third stage, that is, when the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to the third display mode, the third stage is reached (the display mode changes to the third display mode). A second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed at the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the change). The second advance notice effect of the present embodiment is mainly composed of a movable effect for operating the movable decorative member 14, and accompanying this movable effect, a predetermined effect sound is generated and lamps are illuminated. In the second notice effect (movable effect), the movable decorative member 14 falls from the standby position and appears on the front side (display surface side) of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), and this state is maintained for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds). It is performed in a mode of returning (returning) to the standby position after holding.

It should be noted that the second notice effect mainly consists of a movable effect, as well as a display effect of displaying a predetermined notice image on the display screen of the image display device, or generating a predetermined sound effect (output from the speaker). (Do) It can mainly consist of sound effects, or can mainly consist of light effects that cause the board lamps, frame lamps, and other electrical decoration members to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and two or more of them can be combined. can also

In addition to the case where the second notice effect is performed through the execution of the normal first notice effect, the second notice effect may be performed through the execution of the special first notice effect as described later, or may be performed through the execution of the first notice effect. It may be performed alone at a predetermined time (for example, when the production develops) during the variable production. Therefore, the second foretelling effect may or may not be executed prior to the execution of the first foretelling effect (normal first foretelling effect or special first foretelling effect). Therefore, when the first notice effect is executed, the player can expect the subsequent execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect, thereby providing the first notice effect (suggestive effect). It is possible to increase the player's interest in

As described above, in this embodiment, the normal first notice effect is performed up to the third stage, and the shooting star image 300 (first suggestive image) is displayed in the third display mode. , the second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed. A plurality of kinds of times are provided in advance as predetermined times for determining the execution timing of the second notice performance, and when a high expectation pattern is normally selected as the pattern of the first notice performance, the second notice performance is executed. Any one of a plurality of types of time is selected together as the predetermined time until. As the predetermined time, three types of "10 seconds", "25 seconds", and "40 seconds" are provided in this embodiment, and one of them is selected. When the variable performance accompanied by the execution of the normal first notice performance of the high expectation pattern is the big win variation, a relatively long time is more likely to be selected than a short time as the prescribed time until the execution of the second notice performance, In the case of outlier variation, on the contrary, a relatively short time is more likely to be selected than a long time. As a result, the time (predetermined The longer the time), the higher the reliability of the big win.

Normally, when the first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (when the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to the third display mode), the second notice effect is executed (occurred), and during that time. is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. In this embodiment, as an image showing the passage of time, a timer image 400 showing the remaining time until the second announcement effect is executed (occurred) in a countdown format is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in the lower part of FIG. displayed at the top center of the . Therefore, when the variable effect is performed in the normal effect period, first, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the normal first notice effect (suggestive effect) is executed in the variable effect, and the normal first notice effect is performed. When executed, the player is made to pay attention to the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggested image) in the normal first notice effect, and when the display mode of the shooting star image 300 becomes the third display mode, it is displayed there. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the timer image 400 that indicates the remaining time from the second notice effect (high expectation effect) to the execution. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player who expects the execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect (high expectation effect) suggesting that the reliability of the big win is relatively high. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the performance period is not generated (during the normal performance period).

Note that the timer image 400 may indicate the elapsed time until the second announcement effect is executed (occurred) in a count-up format. In this case, the longer the time (predetermined time) it takes for the second notice effect to be executed, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player by drawing the player's attention. In addition, the time from when the normal first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (after the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to the third display mode) to when the second notice effect is executed (occurred) The image showing the progress does not have to be a timer image as in this embodiment. Various images can be employed, such as an image shown in an hourglass format.

Next, the special first notice effect will be explained. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special first notice effect, a character image 500 consisting of the characters "preparing" and a horizontally long rod-shaped gauge image 600 indicating the progress of the special first notice effect are displayed as second suggestion images. It is executed by The character image 500 is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (image display device 7), and the gauge image 600 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71). Both are displayed so as not to impair the visibility of the special effect image related to the special effect being executed on each display screen and the effect of the effect. Further, during execution of the special first notice effect, the display positions of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are not changed (fixed) until the effect is finished. This is also for the purpose of not impairing the visibility and effect of the special effect (special effect image).

As described above, the first notice production pattern has three patterns: a low-reliability pattern (1st stage), a medium-reliability pattern (1st stage→2nd stage), and a high-reliability pattern (1st stage→2nd stage→3rd stage). (see FIG. 60), the display mode of the second suggestive image consisting of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 also has a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first display mode) and a display mode corresponding to the second stage. and a display mode (third display mode) corresponding to the third level. In FIG. 59, the upper stage is the first stage, the middle stage is the second stage, and the lower stage is the third stage. In addition, when the normal first notice effect is performed in two stages or more, the normal first notice effect is executed along with the pseudo-continuous variable effect. It is executed with a non-variable production (non-pseudo-continuous production). During the special effect period, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 59, the effect pattern 8 is displayed in a small size in the lower right portion of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, and the special effect is executed mainly by displaying the special effect image. This is because the pseudo-continuation by the production pattern 8 is poor in the production effect, and the pseudo-continuation (pseudo-continuation production) is not performed.

In the special first notice effect, the display modes of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 gradually change as the execution time of the effect elapses. That is, when the special first notice effect is started, the characters "preparation", "preparation", and "medium" constituting the character image 500 are displayed in a colorless and translucent manner at the time of the start, and the gauge image 600 is displayed. It is displayed when the gauge amount is zero. Then, as the special first notice effect progresses (time passes), the character of "Preparation" among "Preparation", "Preparation", and "Medium" gradually changes from colorless and translucent to colored and opaque. When becomes completely colored and opaque and becomes clearly visible, the first stage of the special first notice effect is completed. At this time, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 59, the character "preparatory" in the character image 500 of "under preparation" is displayed in colored opaque (for example, opaque red), and the remaining characters "preparation" and "medium" are displayed. The characters are still displayed in a colorless and translucent state, and the gauge image 600 is displayed in a state where the gauge amount has progressed to about ⅓ (first display mode). Note that in FIG. 59, the colorless semi-transparent characters of the characters "under preparation" are shown in white. When the special first notice effect is executed in the low-reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the first stage display mode (first display mode) shown in the upper part of FIG. The display mode does not change, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are then erased from the screen, and the special first notice effect ends at the first stage. At substantially the same timing as the end of the special first notice effect or at a later timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 8 ends.

Further, when the special first notice effect progresses to the second stage, as shown in the middle of FIG. red), the remaining characters of "middle" are still displayed in a colorless and semi-transparent state, and the gauge amount of the gauge image 600 is displayed in a state where it has progressed to about 2/3 (second display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed in the medium reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the second stage display mode (second display mode) shown in the middle part of FIG. The display mode does not change, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are then erased from the screen, and the special first notice effect ends at the second stage. At substantially the same timing as the end of the special first notice effect or at a timing later than that, the variable display of the effect pattern 8 ends.

Furthermore, when the special first notice effect progresses to the third stage, as shown in the lower part of FIG. (For example, opaque red), and the gauge amount of the gauge image 600 is displayed in a full state (third display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed in the high-reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the third stage display mode (third display mode) shown in the lower part of FIG. The first notice effect is finished, and then the second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed. This second notice effect is the same effect as the case where it is executed at the timing when a predetermined time has passed after the normal first notice effect has been performed up to the third stage. In other words, this is the advance notice effect that is mainly composed of a movable effect that causes the movable decorative member 14 to move. Further, when the second notice effect is executed after the first normal notice effect is performed, the second notice effect is executed at the timing when a predetermined time has passed after the first normal notice effect is performed up to the third stage. However, the second notice effect that is executed after the special first notice effect is also performed after the special first notice effect has been performed up to the third stage (the display mode of the second suggestive image is changed to the third stage). It is executed at the timing when a predetermined time has passed after the display mode is changed. For this reason, the second notice effect (high expectation effect) that is executed when the first notice effect has been performed up to the third stage has the same aspect (effect content). As a result, the second notice effect (high expectation effect) that is executed after the first notice effect is made common, and the effect can be easily understood by the players.

In this way, the display positions (display positions) of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 relating to the special first notice effect are a part (lower part) of the left sub-liquid crystal display screen 71a and the center main liquid crystal display screen 7a. is provided in a part of (bottom left). A display position (display position) of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 is also called a “second display portion”.

In addition, when the second notice effect is executed after the first special notice effect, the timer image indicating the remaining time until the execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect is displayed on the sub liquid crystal (the second image display device 71, the third It is displayed neither on the display screen of the image display device 72) nor the main liquid crystal (first image display device 7). During the special effect period during which the special first notice effect is executed, the special effect (display of the special effect image) is performed using the sub liquid crystal and the main liquid crystal, and the visibility and effect of the special effect This is so as not to impair However, it is an image different from the timer image 400 (see FIG. 58) when the second notice effect is executed after the first notice effect, and indicates the execution (occurrence) timing of the second notice effect. may be displayed on either one of the left and right sub liquid crystals. Specifically, for example, a count image, which is an image smaller than the timer image 400 and indicates the period until the second notice effect is executed by counting up or down numbers, is displayed, and the value indicated by the count image is displayed. reaches a predetermined value, the second notice effect may be executed. In this case, the count image may be displayed within a range that does not impair the visibility and effect of the special effect.

In addition, when the second notice effect is executed after the first special notice effect, the timing at which the special first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (the timing at which the display mode of the second suggestive image becomes the third display mode) ), the second announcement effect may be executed (occurred). This is because there is no need to display an image (timer image 400 or the like) indicating the period until the second notice effect is executed, and there is no need to provide an image therefor.

Furthermore, when the second notice effect is executed after the special first notice effect, that is, when the second notice effect is executed during the special effect period, the aspect of the second notice effect is changed to the normal first notice effect. , that is, the second notice effect may be executed during the normal effect period. For example, as the second advance notice effect during the special effect period, an image depicting the falling of the movable decorative member 14 (movable effect depiction image) and other images suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is high (high expectation image). may be displayed in a small size on a part of the display screen of the sub-liquid crystal or the main liquid-crystal on which the special effect image is displayed. In this case, for example, a reduced display section such as the aforementioned display section S (see FIG. 57(b)) is provided in a part of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal or the main liquid crystal on which the special effect image is displayed, and the reduced display section is provided. It is possible to configure the display unit to display a movable rendering image, a high-expectation image, or the like. Alternatively, instead of making the second notice effect executed during the special effect period appeal to the player's vision (visual effect) like the movable effect executed as the second notice effect during the normal effect period. Alternatively, an effect (auditory effect) that appeals to the player's sense of hearing may be provided by temporarily generating (outputting) a special sound effect. By adopting these configurations, it is possible to execute the second advance notice effect (high-expectation effect) so as not to impair the visibility and effect of the special effect being executed as much as possible. In this way, by differentiating the aspect (contents of presentation) of the second notice presentation between the normal presentation period and the special presentation period, the second notice is provided in a mode (contents of presentation) suitable for each of the regular presentation period and the special presentation period. It is possible to perform the production. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the second notice effect (high expectation effect) that is executed after the first notice effect has been performed up to three stages, and the difference attracts the player's interest. It becomes possible.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first notice effect can be executed in different modes during the normal effect period and the special effect period. For this reason, the aspect (contents of presentation) of the first notice presentation is different between the normal presentation period and the special presentation period, or the suggestive presentation is executed in a mode (contents of presentation) suitable for each of the regular presentation period and the special presentation period. It becomes possible to As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of both the special effect (display of the special effect image) and the first notice effect, thereby improving the game interest.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the first notice effect (normal first notice effect) is executed during the normal effect period, the first notice effect is a shooting star image 300 ( The first suggestive image) is displayed partially or wholly on the left and right sub-liquid crystal display screens 71a and 72a and the center main liquid crystal display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the first notice effect (special first notice effect) is executed during the special effect period, the first notice effect includes the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 (the first 2 suggested image) is partially displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal and the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal in the center. It is displayed smaller than the shooting star image 300 related to the effect, and the display range (display ratio) that occupies the display screen is also small. Therefore, in the first notice effect executed during the normal effect period, the shooting star image 300 (first suggestive image) is conspicuously displayed to draw the player's attention to the display mode (that is, the normal first notice effect). On the other hand, in the first notice effect executed during the special effect period, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 (second suggestive image) are modestly displayed so as not to impair the effect (special effect) of the special effect image. At the same time, it is possible to suggest the jackpot reliability of the variation. As a result, it is possible to execute notice performances with different impressions in the normal performance period and the special performance period, and the difference attracts the player's interest to improve the amusement of the game.

In the present embodiment, the first notice effect is a step effect in which the display mode (display content) of the suggestive image can be changed stepwise from one step to a plurality of steps according to a predetermined order. With the passage of time, the type of suggestive image (character, item, etc.) displayed in the first notice effect is changed, the display position of the suggestive image is changed, etc., suggesting the reliability of the big hit of the change. As long as it can be done, the production mode does not matter.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment relates to a special effect (RTC effect) that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the RTC function of the second embodiment described above, and has a notice effect function based on the preliminary determination result of the special figure reservation (reservation look-ahead). It is an addition.

Here, in the above-described second embodiment, the third advance notice effect (specific suggestion effect) suggesting that the display result of the variable display currently being executed will be a big hit mode (specific display result) can be executed. In other words, the third notice effect can be executed as a notice effect (big hit notification effect) with a reliability of 100% for the big win. This third notice effect is, for example, displaying a predetermined notice image (jackpot confirmation image) suggesting the jackpot confirmation on the image display device, or generating a sound effect (jackpot confirmation sound) suggesting the jackpot confirmation (speaker This can be done by outputting from

In the second embodiment described above, the third notice effect was made executable as "the change notice", but in the third embodiment, in addition to that, based on the pre-determination result of the special figure reservation (reservation look-ahead) It can also be executed as a "holding prefetch notice". A third notice effect as the reserved prefetch notice can be executed in cooperation with a special effect (RTC effect). In the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 executes the special effect related process (S4301) shown in FIG. 61 as the control related to the execution of the third advance notice effect. The special effect related process (S4301) of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 61 replaces the special effect related process (S4301) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The special effect-related processing (S4301) of the third embodiment will be described below.

In the following description, for configurations different from those in Embodiments 1 and 2, different reference numerals and step numbers are used, and for common configurations, the same reference numerals and step numbers as those in Embodiments 1 and 2 are used. It is assumed that Further, in the following description, it is assumed that the third notice effect (specific suggestive effect) consists of a sound effect (specific sound effect) for outputting a predetermined big hit confirmation sound from the speaker 67 .

[Special effect-related processing of the third embodiment]
Of the special effect related processing (S4301) shown in FIG. 61, the processing contents of S5001 to S5004 are the same as the processing contents of S5001 to S5004 of the special effect related processing (S4301) of the second embodiment described above. is omitted.

If it is determined that the special effect execution flag is not OFF (is ON) in S5001 (NO in S5001), that is, if the special effect is being executed (during the special effect period), it is the timing at which the preceding effect ends. (S5005). As described above, the special effect (RTC effect) provided in the pachinko game machine 1 consists of a preceding effect and a main effect, and when the preceding effect ends, the main effect is subsequently executed (started). It has become. The preceding effect is configured as a countdown effect for displaying a countdown until the start of the main effect, in which the numbers of the number image 200 (countdown image) are counted down one by one (see FIG. 56(a)). ). In S5005, it is determined whether or not it is time for the countdown display in the countdown effect to become "0" (preceding effect end timing). For this determination, for example, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) operates a timer for measuring the execution time of the preceding production with the start of the preceding production (transmission of the special production start command) as a trigger, and the timer can be done by referring to As described above, the preceding performance (countdown performance) is started about 5 seconds before the start of the main performance, so the execution time of the preceding performance is about 5 seconds, and the timing when the 5 seconds have passed is the end timing. Alternatively, the sub control board 90 and the image control board 100 are connected so as to enable two-way communication, the image control microcomputer 101 monitors the countdown status of the number image 200 (countdown image), and the number indicated by the number image 200 is displayed. becomes "0", a signal (feedback signal) indicating that fact is output to the sub-control unit 90, and the end timing of the preceding performance can be determined based on the input of the signal. .

If it is determined in S5005 that it is not the end timing of the preceding effect (NO in S5005), the process ends without performing the processes after S5006. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the preceding effect (YES in S5005), access is made to the effect pending information storage area of the RAM of the sub control board 90, and the stored content (effect pending information) is checked (S5006). As described above, in the effect pending information storage area (obtained information storage means), information such as the prior judgment result and the hit type included in the starting ball entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 is stored as effect pending information. , The memory content (effect pending information) matches the memory content (obtained information) of the special figure pending storage unit (first special figure pending storage unit, second special figure pending storage unit) of the main control unit 80. Therefore, by checking the storage contents (effect pending information) of the effect pending information storage area, it is possible to determine the pre-determination result of the currently stored special figure pending.

Here, as described above, the performance pending information includes special 1 effect pending information corresponding to the first special figure pending and special 2 effect pending information corresponding to the second special figure pending. The information storage area has a special figure 1 effect pending information storage area for storing special figure 1 effect pending information and a special figure 2 effect pending information storage area for storing special figure 2 effect pending information. In S5006, the target of the effect pending information to be checked is switched to the special figure 1 effect pending information or the special figure 2 effect pending information according to the game state at that time. Concretely, when the game state is state A or state B, the special figure 1 effect pending information is checked, and when the game state is state C, the special figure 2 effect pending information is checked. This is because the state A and state B are game states in which the first special symbol is mainly variably displayed, and the state C is a game state in which the second special symbol is variably displayed.

Next, in S5007, as a result of the check by S5006, whether or not the effect pending information (specific effect pending information) in which the result of the prior determination is a big hit is included in the effect pending information stored in the effect pending information storage area. Or, that is, it is determined whether or not big hit suspension (acquisition information with the display result of the variable display as the specific display result) is stored (S5007). Here, the jackpot types include "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot" and There is a "2R 7th jackpot". Of these, the 2R sixth jackpot and the 2R seventh jackpot have a smaller amount of prize balls that can be obtained by the player compared to the other jackpots, and state C (high-probability-low-base state) which is an advantageous gaming state for the player. Since it is a big hit that triggers the end of , it is not subject to judgment in S5007. That is, the 2R 6th big hit and the 2R 7th big win are not subject to the 3rd notice effect, and it is assumed that the 2R 6th big win and 2R 7th big win (2R big win pending) are stored. However, the third foretelling effect based on this is not executed (unexecutable). If this is the target of the third notice effect, it will be disadvantageous to the player, such as not being able to acquire a large number of prize balls or ending the state C (high-probability-low base state) even though the third notice effect is executed. This is because there is a risk that a situation may occur and the player may be offended.

Therefore, in S5007, "15R 1st big hit", "4R 2nd big hit", "4R 3rd big win", "4R 4th big win" or " 15R 5th big hit" is stored, it is determined that the big hit is stored (YES in S5007), and the big hit is not stored (only the missed suspension) or the stored big hit If the hold is the 2R jackpot hold, it is determined that the jackpot hold is not stored (NO in S5007). And, if it is determined that the big hit pending is not stored (NO in S5007), the process ends without performing the processing after S5008, and if it is determined that the big hit pending is stored (YES in S5007), the second 3 Execute the advance notice effect (output a big hit confirmation sound) and finish this process.

By executing the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) by the processing of S5008, a big hit confirmation sound is generated at the timing when the countdown display in the countdown effect becomes "0" (previous effect end timing) (output from the speaker 67 is done). Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize that the special figure reservation stored at that time includes the big hit reservation. As a result, when the special performance is executed (started), the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the third notice performance (specific suggestion performance) is executed before the start of the main performance constituting the special performance, It is possible to improve amusement in the game. In particular, the preceding effect performed prior to the main effect is a countdown effect, and the countdown effect indicates the remaining period until the main effect starts. also indicates the remaining period until the execution (countdown of the third notice effect), and the player assumes that the timing when the countdown display becomes "0" (preceding effect end timing) is the execution timing of the third notice effect. can also be recognized by As a result, it is possible to increase the excitement of the player as the countdown effect approaches the end, and to increase the interest in the period from the start of the special effect to the start of the main effect (especially the interest when the countdown effect ends). can be increased.

In addition, when the game state when the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008 is the normal game state (state A), it is executed after the third notice effect is executed, that is, after the countdown effect (advance effect) ends. The effect image related to the main effect (main effect image) may be displayed not on the main liquid crystal but on the sub liquid crystal as shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b). It is confirmed that the game state will shift to the big win game state (special game state) by later dissipating the big win reservation, and eventually the effect image corresponding to the special game state will be displayed on the main liquid crystal. It is from. In addition, while the main effect image is displayed in reduced size on the sub-liquid crystal, the effect display (reach effect, development effect, etc.) related to the change in the jackpot accompanying the completion of the pending jackpot will be displayed as usual (larger) on the main liquid crystal, etc. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance display (big win variation performance) related to the variation of the big win, and to enhance the interest of the player.

In addition, when the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008, the big hit hold that triggered the execution of the third notice effect is extinguished, and the big win pattern is confirmed and displayed (the specific display result is derived and displayed) or Until the start of the jackpot game (that is, until the occurrence of the jackpot), the effect image (main effect image) related to the main effect performed after the execution of the third notice effect (after the preceding effect) may be hidden (not visible). good. This is also because it is possible to draw the player's attention to the big win variation presentation accompanying the completion of the big win pending, thereby enhancing the interest. In this case, the main effect image can be displayed (becomes visible) with the start of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, when the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008, a further premium effect (dedicated effect) is executed in the period until the occurrence of the big hit (confirmed display of the big win pattern or the start of the big win game). Moi. By doing so, it is possible to make the effect of the execution of the third advance notice effect more prominent when the countdown effect ends. As such a premium effect, for example, displaying a dedicated image (dedicated image) suggesting determination of the on-hold jackpot is exemplified.

Further, in the third embodiment, the timing at which the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008 is the end timing of the preceding effect, that is, the timing at which the number of the number image 200 counted down by the countdown effect becomes "0". However, the timing at which the third notice effect is executed is any timing between the start of the preceding effect (special effect) and the end of the preceding effect (within the execution period of the preceding effect). good. That is, the third notice effect may be executed at a predetermined time from when the special effect (preceding effect) is started to when the preceding effect is finished based on the fulfillment of the conditions for execution of the special effect. For example, when the preceding effect is the countdown effect described above, the third notice effect is executed at the timing when the number of the number image 200 is counted down from "5" to "0". can be configured to Also by this, when the special performance is executed (started), the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the third notice performance (specific suggestive performance) is executed before the main performance constituting the special performance is started. , it is possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, when executing the third notice effect at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect (preceding effect) to the end of the preceding effect, the execution time (execution timing) may be determined. In this case, for example, the effect pending information was checked at the end timing of the preceding effect by the processing of S5005 and S5006 described above, but instead of this, the effect pending information at the start timing of the special effect, that is, the start timing of the preceding effect to check. As a result, when the third notice performance is to be executed due to the memorization of the big hit reservation, it is determined by a random number lottery or the like at which timing within the execution period of the preceding performance the third notice performance is to be executed. decide. As a result, the player does not know at what timing the third notice performance can be executed from the start of the special performance (preceding performance) to the end of the preceding performance, so the third notice performance can be executed. It is possible to further enhance the interest within the preceding performance period.

In addition, in the present embodiment 3, as a result of the performance suspension information check by S5006, when the big hit suspension related to the jackpot other than the 2R jackpot is stored, the third notice performance is executed. The third advance notice performance may be executed when a big hit reservation (specific jackpot reservation) related to a specific jackpot is stored among the big hits. Specifically, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the state C (second game state) jackpot, that is, jackpot suspension related to any of "15R first jackpot", "4R second jackpot" and "15R fifth jackpot" Acquisition information as a result) is stored, the third advance notice effect is executed. In this case, the game state after the end of the big win game is the state B (first game state), which is the big win "4R third big win" or "4R fourth big win" (display result of fluctuation display) is stored as the first specific display result), the third announcement effect is not executed. In this way, at the start of the special effect, when it is confirmed to shift to the state C (high-probability-low base state) which is the most advantageous game state for the player among the variable game states, the main effect is performed. The third foretelling effect will be executed before the start, and the third foretelling effect foretells the determination of the transition to the state C. - 特許庁This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to whether or not the third foretelling effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed when the special effect is executed. In addition, when the big hit reservation related to either the "4R third big win" or the "4R fourth big win" is stored, instead of not executing the third notice effect, another notice effect may be executed. good. In this way, after the start of the special performance, depending on the type of notice performance that can be executed before the start of the main performance, whether the big win suspension that works relatively favorably for the player is stored or the other big win suspension is stored. It is possible to suggest in a discriminable manner whether the This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the advance notice effect that can be executed before the start of the main effect.

Next, Example 4 of the present invention will be described. In the fourth embodiment, a canceling function is added to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the RTC function of the second and third embodiments described above so that the execution of the special performance (RTC performance) can be stopped at will by the player. It is what I did. In realizing this cancel function, the special effect stop selection process (S4300) is executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 in the 10ms timer interrupt process (S4010) shown in FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 62 replaces the 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) of the first and second embodiments shown in FIGS. The special effect stop selection process (S4300) will be described below.

In the following description, for configurations different from those in Examples 1 to 3, different reference numerals, step numbers, etc., are used, and for common configurations, the same reference numerals, step numbers, etc. as in Examples 1 to 3 are used. It is assumed that

[Special production stop selection process]
As shown in FIG. 63, in the special effect stop selection process (S4300), first, it is determined whether or not the acceptance period flag is OFF (S6001). Here, in this embodiment, an operation lever (not shown) for inputting an operation signal to the sub-control board 90 is provided around the top plate 61 of the front frame 51 separately from the effect button 63 . This operating lever functions as input means for the player to make an input, like the performance button 63 . The period during which the sub-control board 90 (the production control microcomputer 91) can process the input of the operation signal based on the operation of the operation lever as valid is the "acceptance period" (operation valid period). ). The acceptance period flag is a flag indicating whether or not the acceptance period is in progress.

The reason why an operation lever is provided separately from the production button 63 is that the execution timing of the production (operation corresponding production) based on the operation of the production button 63 and the selection timing of execution/non-execution (stop) of the special production overlap. This is due to consideration of when In other words, if no operation lever is provided, the operation of the effect button 63 under the situation where these two timings overlap can be either "operation corresponding effect" or "execution/non-execution (cancellation) selection". It is necessary to deal with one or both of them, which makes the control complicated. In order to avoid such complicated control, an operation lever is provided separately from the production button 63.

If it is determined in S6001 that the acceptance period flag is not OFF (it is ON) (NO in S6001), the process proceeds to S6004 described later, and if it is determined that the acceptance period flag is OFF (YES in S6001), the acceptance It is determined whether or not it is time to start the period (S6002). In this embodiment, the time measured by the RTC 92 is configured so that the acceptance period occurs (is set) from before the start time (predetermined time) of the special effect to the start time. there is Specifically, the reception period is 15 seconds from 30 seconds before the start time. Therefore, in S6002, it is determined whether or not it is 30 seconds before the start of the special effect, and if so, it is determined that it is time to start the reception period (YES in S6002), and if not, the reception period (NO in S6002). The start timing of the acceptance period and the length of the acceptance period are not limited to the times shown in this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined.

If it is determined in S6002 that it is not the time to start the acceptance period (NO in S6002), this process ends without performing the processes after S6003, and if it is determined that it is the time to start the acceptance period (YES in S6002), the acceptance The period flag is turned ON (S6003), and the selection screen display start command is set in the sub output buffer (S6004). When the selection screen display start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-described command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays a selection screen (selection image) that allows the player to select execution or cancellation of the special effect. is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the selection screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. At this time, when a variable effect or a big win game effect is being executed on the display screen 7a, the selection screen is displayed superimposed on the near side of the effect image being executed. In addition, if the effect being executed is a specific effect with a relatively low appearance rate (selection rate) among a plurality of predetermined effects, such as a super reach effect or a development effect, the wipe screen described above will be displayed. Alternatively, the selection screen may be displayed in a smaller size than usual. The display section (selected image display section) on which the selection screen is displayed may not be the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, but may be any of the display screens 71a and 72a of the left and right sub liquid crystals.

Although illustration of the selection screen is omitted here, the content of the selection screen may be, for example, "Would you like to watch a drama?" message image is displayed in the upper area of the screen, and a text image of "Yes" and a text image of "No" are displayed side by side or vertically below the message image, and "Yes" is displayed according to the operation of the operation lever ” or “No” can be displayed as selectable. When the selection screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, the player recognizes the occurrence (start) of a period (acceptance period) during which execution/non-execution (cancellation) of the special effect can be selected. is possible, and while the selection screen is displayed, that is, by operating the operation lever within the acceptance period, "Yes" (execution of special effect) or "No" (non-execution of special effect) is selected. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, an operation lever is provided separately from the effect button 63, and it is possible to select "Yes" or "No" (execution/non-execution of special effect) by operating the operation lever, but the first effect button It may be possible to select by operating either one or both of the 63a and the second effect button 63b. Input means provided separately from the effect button 63 may not be an operation lever, and may be, for example, a touch panel or a dial type switch.

Next, in S6005, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the acceptance period (S6005). In this embodiment, as described above, the acceptance period is 15 seconds from 30 seconds before the start of the special effect. Therefore, in S6005, it is determined whether or not 15 seconds have passed since the start of the reception period (reception period flag ON). If not, it is determined that it is not the end timing of the acceptance period (NO in S6005). Incidentally, the determination of S6005, for example, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91), triggered by the start of the reception period (reception period flag ON), operates a timer for measuring the elapsed time of the reception period, the It can be done by referring to the timer.

If it is determined in S6005 that it is not the time to end the reception period (NO in S6005), this process ends without performing the processes after S6006. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the reception period (YES in S6005), it is determined whether or not there is an instruction to stop the special effect scheduled to start after this (S6006). This determination is made by referring to the result of selection on the aforementioned selection screen. That is, when the reception period ends, it is determined whether "Yes" (execution of special effect) or "No" (non-execution of special effect) on the selection screen was selected, and "Yes" is If it is selected, it is determined that there is no special performance stop instruction (NO at S6006), and if "No" is selected, it is determined that there is a special performance stop instruction (YES at S6006).

If it is determined in S6006 that there was no instruction to stop the special effect (NO in S6006), proceed to the processing of S6009 described later, and if it is determined that there was an instruction to stop the special effect (YES in S6006), the special effect flag is turned ON. (S6007), and the next special effect information command is set in the sub output buffer (S6008). When the next special effect information command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-described command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 generates an image corresponding to the information on the special effect (main effect) to be executed in the next cycle. Data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the information is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal (information display section). The information displayed at this time is the information displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal during the normal effect period described in the second embodiment (the remaining time until the next special effect starts, the next special effect (main effect), etc.). content, etc.).

In this way, information about the next special effect is displayed based on the confirmation of the cancellation (cancellation) of the current special effect, so that the player can know that the current special effect has been cancelled. As well as being able to do so, it becomes possible to know about the special performance to be executed next. As a result, it is possible to add the "special effect canceling function" and the "next special effect information display function" to the gaming machine having the RTC function, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming machine.

In addition, the special effect stop flag turned ON in S6007 is a flag indicating that the execution of the special effect this time is to be stopped (prohibited), and when the special effect start time comes, the special effect is executed (started). It is referred to before (before turning on the special effect execution flag) (see FIGS. 55 and 61). Then, when the special effect start time comes (YES in S5002), if the special effect stop flag is ON, the special effect is not started (without setting the special effect start command). , the processing related to the start of the special effect (special effect-related processing) ends. As a result, the special effect that was scheduled to be executed this time will not be executed. Note that the special effect stop flag is turned OFF when the time has passed without starting (executing) the special effect even though the start time of the special effect has come.

Next, the reception period flag that was turned ON in S6003 is turned OFF (S6009), and the selection screen display end command is set in the sub-output buffer (S6010) to end this process. When the selection screen display end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-described command transmission processing (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 erases the above-described selection screen displayed up to that time. This allows the player to recognize the end of the acceptance period.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment described above, the player operates the operation lever through the selection screen displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) during the acceptance period that occurs within the predetermined time before the start of the special effect. By performing the selection operation (input by the input means), it is possible to arbitrarily stop the execution before the execution of the special effect is started. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine having the RTC function by adding a function of canceling the special effect that is periodically executed based on the result of timekeeping by the RTC 92 .

Further, in the third embodiment described above, when the function of canceling the special effect according to the fourth embodiment is added, if the execution of the special effect is stopped before the execution of the special effect is started, a predetermined period of time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect can be obtained. Execution of the above-described third foretelling effect (specific suggestion effect) that may be executed (at the end of the preceding effect in the third embodiment) is also stopped. As a result, it is possible to set (select) the execution mode of the effect according to the player's preference.

Here, during the normal performance period, which is outside the execution period of the special performance (RTC performance), as described above, information regarding the special performance (main performance) to be executed in the next period (also referred to as "next special performance information"). is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal. That is, the remaining time until the next special effect is executed (started) and the contents of the next special effect (main effect) are displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal. This next special effect information is displayed until, in principle, the main effect constituting the special effect is executed (started). However, depending on the production mode of the variable production executed during the normal production period (including the production mode of the advance notice production when executing the advance notice production), the display content (display mode) may change.

Specifically, the next special effect information being displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is hidden and the effect image related to the variable effect is displayed there depending on the effect mode of the variable effect (and/or advance notice effect). In other cases, the effect image related to the variable effect is superimposed and displayed in front of the next special effect information being displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). For example, when executing the variable effect, the entire screen of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) and the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a) is used to display a effect image (also referred to as an "integrated effect image") with a sense of unity. In this case, the next special effect information (pre-start image) displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) before the start of display of this integrated effect image is hidden, and then the integrated effect image is displayed on the main liquid crystal and left and right. Displayed on the sub LCD. In addition, while the main effect images (effect pattern, effect pending image, background image, etc.) related to the variable effect are displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), the notice image related to the change is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). In this case, the preview image is superimposed on the next special effect information (pre-start image) displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) before the start of display of the preview image. By changing the display contents (display mode) of the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) according to the effect mode (effect pattern) in this way, it is possible to realize a varied effect display, which attracts the player's interest. It is possible to enhance amusement in the game. This also applies to the left sub-liquid crystal (display screen 71a).

In the above-described embodiment, the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed in the performance symbol display section are the special symbols set as the subject of the game in the game state (the first special symbols to be described later). It is assumed that the variable display is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol). That is, 1 production pattern (three digits) is displayed on the production pattern display unit, and synchronized with one of the first special pattern and the second special pattern according to the game state, thereby synchronizing with the first special pattern. It has a case and a case of synchronizing with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first production pattern and the second production pattern are displayed, the fluctuation display of the first production pattern is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special pattern, and the second production pattern is changed to the second special pattern. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of . Also, when both the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern are displayed, the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (one special pattern) set as the main part of the game in the game state is displayed large (the main part ), and the effect pattern corresponding to the special pattern (the other special pattern) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is set to 1/5 or less. In addition, instead of always displaying both the first production pattern and the second production pattern, depending on the game state and the game situation, when both the first production pattern and the second production pattern are displayed, and the first production pattern is displayed. One of the effect pattern and the second effect pattern (main pattern) may be displayed.

In addition, for the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a "variable ball entrance" that can change between a state in which a game ball can be entered and a state in which a game ball cannot be entered, A "special game executing means" capable of executing a special game that puts the variable ball entrance into a ball-enterable state when the result of the first win-or-fail judgment or the second win-fail judgment can be provided. Also, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed between a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that of the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is a predetermined frequency, and a game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable start port is higher than that in the game state. and a "game state setting means" for setting the state (second game state). Here, 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the number of openings of the first big prize opening or the second big winning opening in one round is one, but the number of openings of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is A plurality of rounds may be used, or different rounds may be opened. In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation are control processing that can be changed simultaneously, but the control processing that prioritizes the second special figure reservation over the first special figure reservation , So-called Toku-zu 2 priority control processing, control processing to digest the first Toku-zu reservation preferentially to the second Toku-zu reservation, so-called Toku-zu 1 priority control processing. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and among the first special reservation and the second special reservation, the oldest one is digested in order. It may be a control process, that is, a control process of digestion in order of entry (in order of memory).

In addition, a pachinko machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state) has a specific area inside and has a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. A large winning opening is provided that can be changed to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball, and the big winning opening is placed in a state in which it is possible to enter a ball for a predetermined time when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a big winning hole in which a ball is possible and passes through a specific area, it becomes a big win, a big win game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given to a Pachinko game machine. This pachinko game machine is called a so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a big hit, the big win game is executed without passing through the specific area. Also, as a privilege, generating a high base state that increases the frequency of entry of the game ball into the starting hole can be mentioned. Further, it has a first starting hole and a second starting hole, and can generate a high base state that increases the frequency of hitting the second starting hole. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the probability variation function can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability variation function. is not limited to this, for example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as medium probability (third probability) higher than low probability (first probability) and lower than high probability (second probability) good too. Furthermore, first low probability and first high probability (first probability condition), second low probability and second high probability (second probability condition), third low probability and third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , a plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selected) when the gaming machine is powered on, for example. good too.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) stored in the special figure reservation storage unit is read, and the read acquisition random number value (acquisition information) is determined. (Pre-judgment) was supposed to be performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see Figs. 11, 13, etc.), but the method of pre-judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, the area (acquired information storage means) that stores the acquired information that is subject to preliminary determination (that is, the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball) is stored in the main control unit and sub-control It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the obtained information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information used for the preliminary determination (acquired information stored in another storage area). Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, it may be pre-determined for the acquisition information acquired based on the starting ball. That is, it may be determined in advance before storing the acquisition information in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, there is no need to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to preliminary judgment separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and the acquisition information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit need to be read out for preliminary judgment do not have.

In the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board-side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) are provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame-side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but the sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the main liquid crystal (the first image display device) as the board side display means. device 7), or one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub-liquid crystal or right sub-liquid crystal) is replaced with one sub-liquid crystal on the game board side. can be done. Alternatively, while the two sub liquid crystals (the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72) shown in the above embodiment are provided, it is also possible to provide one or more sub liquid crystals on the game board side. be. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image display device 7) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area) The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all liquid crystal display devices (liquid crystal display devices), but the type of the display device is not limited to liquid crystal, and may be, for example, a drum display device or the like. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Furthermore, different types of display devices may be mixed in a plurality of display devices, each of which consists of a main display device and a sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display device or a 7-segment display device, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be dot displays. As a result, it is possible to display a variety of presentations using a plurality of display devices having different display methods, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine is provided with a first starting port, a second starting port, a first big prize winning port and a second big winning port, and when a game ball enters the first starting port, a first symbol is variably displayed, and a second There is a game ball that variably displays a second symbol when a game ball enters the second starting port. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is a jackpot symbol and is stopped and displayed, either the first big prize hole or the second big prize hole is opened, or the first big prize hole and the second big prize hole are opened. There is a gaming machine that executes a jackpot game in which winning ports are opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

In addition, in the conventional game machine, the second start port is a variable start port, and the ball entry frequency is reduced in the low base state, and the ball entry frequency is increased in the high base state. There were some players who aimed at the 1st starting port and, in the high base state, aimed at the 2nd starting port. In addition, there is a game machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is played aiming at the right side area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state occurs. In such a gaming machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once an advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the end of the advantageous state, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional game machine, the mode of transition of the game state is uniform, and it has not been able to provide a highly interesting game.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike the conventional game machine, it provides a game state with high interest, diversifies the transition mode of the game state, and enhances the game interest. It provides gaming machines.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A first starting port into which a game ball can enter;
A second start port that can change between a first state and a second state in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that in the first state;
A third starting port into which a game ball can enter;
a first right/wrong determination executing means for executing a first right/wrong determination based on the ball entering the first starting port or the second starting port;
a second right/wrong judgment execution means for executing a second right/wrong judgment executed based on the ball entering the third starting port;
A first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second start port is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second start port is higher than that in the first game state. a game state setting means capable of setting ,
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first success/failure determination or the second success/failure determination is a big hit (first specified result), wherein the first start-up The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second start port and the third start port are provided in the second game area,
A first game (low-probability low base state) in which a game ball is shot into the first game area in the first game state and the first success/failure determination is mainly executed, and the second game in the second game state A second game (low-probability-high base state) in which a game ball is fired into the area and executed mainly for the first success/failure determination, and a game ball is fired into the second game area in the first game state and the second game is executed. 2. A third game (high-probability-low base state) that is executed mainly for success/failure determination.

According to such a gaming machine, the first starting port for executing the first right/wrong judgment is arranged in the first game area, and the first right/wrong judgment is executed in the second game area (the first state and the second state ) and a variable third starting port for executing the second right/wrong determination are arranged. In addition, as the game state, a first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second start port is low (predetermined frequency), and a game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the second start port is higher than in the first game state. and a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, the first game is executed aiming at the first start opening of the first game area and the first success/failure determination is mainly performed, and the second start opening of the second game area is executed in the second game state. A first game that shoots aiming at and executes mainly the first right or wrong judgment, and a second game that shoots aiming at the third start opening of the second game area in the first game state and executes the second right or wrong judgment mainly 1 game;

As a result, the player can play the first game, the second game, and the third game with different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and can increase the interest in the game by various transition modes of the game state and new game characteristics. It becomes possible. In addition, in the first game state, the frequency of entering a ball into the first start opening after being launched into the first game area is higher than the frequency of entering a ball into the second start opening after being launched into the second game area. may be higher.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
As a result of the first success/failure determination in the first game that shoots the game ball to the first game area, it has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the first success/failure determination in the second game that shoots the game ball to the second game area, it has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the second success/failure determination in the third game in which the game ball is shot into the second game area, there is a third big hit and a fourth big hit,
In the first game, when the result of the first success/failure determination is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first success/failure determination is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. year,
In the second game, when the result of the first success/failure determination is the first jackpot, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first success/failure determination is the second jackpot, the third game can be executed. year,
In the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second success/failure determination is the third jackpot, and the third game can be executed when the result of the second success/failure determination is the fourth jackpot. It is characterized by

According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first right or wrong determination in the first game that shoots the game ball to the first game area, and the first right or wrong determination in the second game that shoots the game ball to the second game area As a result, it has a first big hit and a second big hit, and has a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second success/failure determination in the third game in which the game ball is shot into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first win/fail judgment is the first jackpot, and the third game can be executed when the second jackpot is reached. Further, when the second game is reached, the second game can be executed when the result of the first win/fail determination in the second game is the first jackpot, and the third game can be executed when the second jackpot is won. Further, when the third game is reached, the second game can be executed when the result of the second success/failure determination in the third game is the third big win, and the third game can be executed when the fourth big win is achieved.

Thus, even if the first game after the start of the game results in either the first big win or the second big win, the subsequent game is played by shooting the game balls to the second game area. Further, while performing a game of shooting to the second game area, whether the second game is performed or the third game is performed, the game (second game) for performing the first success/fail judgment 2. It is possible to play a game while changing the game mode (game state) between the game (third game) in which the success/failure determination is performed. In addition, as a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by means of various game state transition modes and new game features.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2,
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state based on the execution of the first success/failure determination a specific number of times, and the game is shifted to the first game. .

According to such a gaming machine, when the first success/failure determination is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the second game is shifted to the first game by executing the success/failure determination for a specific number of times. In addition, in the game that executes the same first propriety determination, it will shift from the shooting game to the second game area to the shooting game to the first game area. In addition, as a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by means of various game state transition modes and new game features.

Incidentally, the third game may be continued even when the second success/failure determination is executed a specific number of times. Further, the third game may be continued until the result of the second win/fail judgment is a big win.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 1-1 to 1-3,
A small win (second specific result) is provided as a result of the second success/failure determination, and a predetermined amount of game profit can be obtained when the small win is achieved,
The second right or wrong determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first right or wrong determination,
In the second game, the execution frequency of the first success/failure determination is made higher than in the first game, so that the speed of decrease of the game medium used in the game is slower than in the first game,
The third game is characterized in that the reduction speed of the game medium is slower than that of the second game by making it possible to obtain a game profit by the small win.

According to such a gaming machine, as a result of the second success/failure determination, there is a small hit capable of obtaining a predetermined amount of game profit, and the second success/failure determination has a higher probability than the first success/failure determination. It is assumed to be a hit. That is, the probability that the third game is a small hit is higher than that of the first game and the second game. Further, the second game in the second game state has a higher execution frequency of the first win/fail judgment than the first game in the first game state. In the second game, the speed of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the speed of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. As a result, the third game is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is more advantageous than the first game. In addition, this makes it possible to diversify transition modes between various game states with different degrees of advantage, and to increase the interest in the game through new game features. In addition, it is possible to have a small hit as a result of the second right/wrong determination and not have a small hit as a result of the first right/wrong determination.

Also, in the second game state, it may have a fourth game (high probability high base state) in which a game ball is shot into the second game area and the first success/failure determination is mainly performed. Also, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, in the fourth game, the execution frequency of the first success/failure determination is made higher than in the first game, so that the speed of decrease of the game medium is slower than in the first game, and in the third game, the game is played by a small win. By making it possible to obtain a profit, the speed of decrease of the game medium may be slower than that of the second game and the fourth game. Further, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the speed of decrease of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Also, in the first game, when the result of the first win/fail judgment is the first big hit (equivalent to the 4R fourth big hit in the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first win/fail judgment is the second big hit ( When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of the first embodiment are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit/fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of the first embodiment). making the fourth game executable,
In the second game, when the result of the first success/failure determination is the first big hit (equivalent to the 4R fourth big hit in the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success/failure determination is the second big hit (embodiment 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit/fail determination is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot in the first embodiment), the fourth game is played. making it possible to play games,
In the third game, when the result of the second success/failure determination is the third big hit (equivalent to the 2R seventh big hit in the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second success/failure determination is the fourth big hit (embodiment 1), the third game can be executed, and the fourth game can be executed when the result of the second success/failure determination is the sixth big win (corresponding to the 2R sixth big win in the first embodiment). ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first success/failure determination is the first big hit (equivalent to the 4R fourth big hit in the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success/failure determination is the second big hit (embodiment 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit/fail determination is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot in the first embodiment), the fourth game is played. A game may be executable.

It should be noted that the "decrease speed of the game medium used in the game" refers to the game medium used (shot game balls) in a unit time (for example, 1 minute) or in the unit number of shots (for example, 100 shots), and given during the same period. The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid-out prize balls) is calculated as the decreased number of game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is played for a predetermined period, the decreasing speed of the game medium (game ball, held ball) held by the player is set in descending order of decreasing speed. , 1st game > 2nd game (4th game) > 3rd game. It should be noted that the third game can be said to have a negative decreasing speed because it is possible to increase the number of balls possessed by a small hit as the game continues. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are states in which the number of balls in possession is reduced while the third game is in a state in which the number of balls in possession is increased.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first hit/fail judgment is a jackpot is more type than the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second hit/fail judgment is a jackpot A large number may be used. In addition, as the third game (high-probability-low base state) generated as a result of the second win-or-fail judgment, there is a case where it becomes a third game after a big hit game in which it is difficult to win a prize ball, and a case where it is difficult to win a prize ball. and a case where it becomes the third game through an easy jackpot game. In addition, as the third game (high-probability-low base state) generated as a result of the first success/failure determination, there is no case where the third game goes through a jackpot game in which it is difficult to win a prize ball. It may be provided only when the third game is played after a jackpot game that is easy to win.

Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second success/failure determination is set to be higher than the probability of a big hit in the high probability, so that the possibility of occurrence of a small success in the second success/failure determination can be increased. More preferably, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second success/failure determination should be 1/2 or more. Also, the probability of entry into the high-probability state (probability of operation of the probability variation function) is assumed to be the same between the first right/wrong determination and the second right/wrong determination. On the other hand, the probability of entering the state C (high probability low base state) may be different between the first correctness judgment and the second correctness judgment, and the state C (high probability low base state) of the second correctness judgment may be higher than the first right/wrong determination. As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the shooting game to the second game area in which the third game in which the second success/failure determination is performed can be performed, and to increase the interest in the game.

Also, in the second success/failure determination, if a big hit that does not enter state C (high-probability/low base state) occurs, the big hit is the number of prize balls that can be acquired among the big wins (jackpot games) in the second success/failure determination. is the smallest jackpot (jackpot game). In addition, the jackpot is the jackpot (jackpot game) with the smallest number of obtainable prize balls among the jackpots (jackpot games) in the first win/fail judgment and the second win/fail judgment.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the mode of transition of the game state and enhances the amusement of the game.

(Reference invention 2)
In the conventional game machine, there is a game machine that determines whether a game ball is entered into a start hole, and variably displays a symbol based on the result of the determination. In such a game machine, when the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, and when the result of winning/failure determination is a loss, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. . In addition, there is a game machine having a plurality of special symbols and performance symbols as symbols (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbols and effect symbols of the conventional gaming machine are both variably displayed and stop-displayed based on the result of the success/failure determination. In addition, the special symbols show the result of the winning/failure determination by being displayed stationary without performing game effects such as reach variation after variable display, and the performance symbols are displayed statically after performing game effects such as reach variation after variable display. This was to show the result of the judgment of suitability. By having a plurality of symbols in this manner, it is possible to perform display control according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the matching of both symbols due to the relationship between the display modes and display positions of the multiple symbols. This reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by facilitating confirmation of a plurality of symbols by means of a display mode of the plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
a success/failure determination executing means for executing a success/failure determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
A first identification information display unit (first special symbol display device 41a, second special symbol display device 41b) that variably displays the first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the propriety determination,
A second identification information display unit (production pattern display unit 7b) that variably displays the second identification information (production pattern) based on the result of the suitability determination;
A third identification information display unit (variation state indicator 49) that variably displays the third identification information (state pattern, confirmation pattern) based on the result of the suitability determination;
A game effect display unit (performance symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (such as a ready-to-win effect) executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information;
A gaming machine comprising special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the success/failure determination is a specific result,
a first display unit (main display 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit;
A second display section (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display section and the game effect display section.

According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information display unit variably displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol), and the second identification information (effect symbol) is variably displayed. a second identification information display unit that displays the third identification information (status symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner; and a game effect that is executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information. and a game effect display unit. Also, a first display portion configured to have a first identification information display portion and the third identification information display portion, and a second display configured to have a second identification information display portion and a game effect display portion and

Thus, by checking the second display unit, it is possible to check the second identification information indicating the result of the win-or-fail judgment and the game effect, and by checking the first display unit, it is possible to confirm the result of the win-or-fail judgment. It is possible to confirm the first identification information and the third identification information that are displayed by pressing the button.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
A gaming machine having a game area in which game balls can flow down, and performing a game by causing game balls to flow down in the game area,
The first display section is provided inside the game area, and the second display section is provided outside the game area.

According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit configured to have the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is arranged outside (outside) the game area, and the second identification information display unit is arranged outside the game area. A second display section including an information display section and a game effect display section is arranged inside (inside) the game area. Thus, by providing the second display unit for displaying the second identification information indicating the result of the game effect such as the ready-to-win effect and the winning/failure determination within the game area, the player can check the flow of the game ball while checking the second display unit. It is possible to confirm the display mode of In addition, the first display unit, which can confirm the first identification information and the third identification information, is separated from the second display unit and arranged outside the game area. It is possible to reliably grasp the display modes of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display part is arranged outside the game area (area outside the rail member that divides the game area), and the second display part is inside the game area (area inside the rail member that divides the game area) may be placed in

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2,
The first display section is composed of an LED, the second display section is composed of a liquid crystal,
The second display section is characterized by being larger than the first display section.

According to such a game machine, the first display section is composed of LEDs, the second display section is composed of liquid crystal, and the second display section is larger than the first display section. As a result, the display mode of the first display section is made simple, and the display modes of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped reliably, and the second display section is made larger than the first display section. In addition, by constructing it with liquid crystal, it is possible to execute various and colorful game performances, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
a main control unit having the propriety determination execution means;
a sub control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control,
The first identification information display section constituting the first display section is display-controlled by a main control section, and the third identification information display section and the second display section constituting the first display section are controlled by a sub control section. It is characterized by performing display control.

Such a game machine has a main control section and a sub-control section that receives a control signal from the main control section and performs control. The display of the first identification information display section of the first display section is controlled by the main control section, and the display of the third identification information display section is controlled by the sub control section. Further, the secondary control unit controls the display of the second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information. That is, the first display section displays the first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control section and the third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub-control section. Thus, by checking the first display section, it is possible to check both the display modes of the identification information (the first identification information and the third identification information) controlled by the main control section and the sub-control section. Further, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control section and the sub-control section.

The main control unit is a control unit that controls the display of special symbols, control related to winning/failure determination, control related to sensor detection, control related to the discharge of prize balls, and control related to the opening and closing of the variable entrance, and is a control unit that governs the game. is. In addition, the sub control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and the main control unit that performs control related to game performance such as operation control of the movable member and display control of the performance display unit. It is a subordinate control unit of the control unit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4,
game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information;
power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
game information recovery means for recovering the game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
When the game information restoring means restores the game information, the third identification information display section is restored earlier than the second display section, and display control can be executed.

According to such a game machine, when power supply is started, the game information recovery means is provided for recovering the game information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means. . When the game information is restored, the third identification information display section of the first display section is restored earlier than the second display section so that display control can be executed. The second display section is composed of a liquid crystal in order to diversify the game effects, and since it performs various display controls, it takes a certain amount of time to restore the game information. On the other hand, the first display section (third identification information display section), which is simply configured with LEDs, performs simple display control, so it does not take a long time to restore the game information.

As a result, even if the display units are controlled by the same sub-control unit, the third identification information display unit can be restored before the second display unit, and the display control can be executed as quickly as possible. In addition, as a result, after the power supply is started, the game can be started as soon as the main control unit is restored, but the second display unit composed of liquid crystal takes time to recover (it is still not restored after the game starts). not). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents controlled by the sub-controller by confirming the third identification information display section, which has become the first to spread and is capable of starting display control.

According to the gaming machine of this reference invention 2, it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the plurality of symbols by the display mode of the plurality of symbols, and to provide a fair gaming machine.

(Reference invention 3)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines are provided with production devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), speakers, etc., and various productions are executed according to the progress of a game. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect that is different from the normal effect that accompanies the progress of the game, every time a predetermined time is measured. By arranging a plurality of gaming machines equipped with such functions on an island facility in a gaming hall, a special effect by a plurality of gaming machines can be executed all at once at a predetermined cycle (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -180295).

However, the function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals has already been widely known, and simply providing such a function is insufficient to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to improve the game amusement of a game machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming a specific display result;
a special effect period generating means capable of generating a special effect period in which a special effect image is displayed on a predetermined display section at a predetermined cycle;
and a production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The production executing means is
capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a possibility that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result;
The suggestive effect can be executed in different modes depending on whether the special effect period is not generated and when the special effect period is generated.

According to such a gaming machine, when a special effect period that can occur in a predetermined cycle does not occur (during a period other than the special effect period) and when it occurs (during the special effect period), a specific display Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility of deriving the result (degree of expectation) can be executed in different modes. For this reason, the mode of suggested production (contents of production) is different between the period other than the special production period (hereinafter also referred to as the "normal production period") and the special production period, and the special production period is suitable for each period. It is possible, for example, to execute a suggestive effect in a manner (content of the effect). As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of both the special effect period (display of the special effect image) and the suggestive effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
The suggestive effect is executed by displaying, on a predetermined display unit, a suggestive image, which is an image whose display mode can change and which suggests the degree of possibility according to the display mode,
The production executing means is
displaying a first suggestive image as the suggestive image on a first display unit when the suggestive effect is to be executed when the special effect period has not occurred;
When the suggestive effect is executed while the special effect period is occurring, a second suggestive image different from the first suggestive image is displayed as the suggestive image on a second display unit different from the first display unit. It is characterized in that it is displayed in a smaller size than the 1 suggestive image.

According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestive effect is executed during the normal effect period, the suggestive effect is executed by displaying the first suggestive image whose display mode can change on the first display unit. be. On the other hand, when a suggestive effect is executed during the special effect period, the suggestive effect is executed by displaying a second suggestive image whose display mode can be changed on a second display unit different from the first display unit, The second suggestive image in this case is displayed smaller than the first suggestive image. Therefore, in the suggestive effect executed during the normal effect period, the suggestive image (first suggestive image) is conspicuously displayed to draw the player's attention to the display mode (suggestive effect), while the suggestive effect is executed during the special effect period. In the suggestive effect to be executed, the suggestive image (second suggestive image) is modestly displayed so as not to impair the effect of the special effect image, while suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to provide suggestive effects with different impressions between the normal effect period and the special effect period, and the difference can attract the player's interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 described above,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a high expectation production that suggests that the possibility is high,
When the suggestive effect is executed and then the high-expectation effect is executed when the special effect period has not occurred, the display mode of the first suggestive image displayed in the suggestive effect is a predetermined display mode. The high expectation effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change to
A timer image indicating the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on a predetermined display unit until the predetermined time elapses after the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to the predetermined display mode. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a high-expectation effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is highly likely to be the specific display result, and the suggestive effect is performed during the normal effect period. is executed and the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to a predetermined display mode, a high-expectation effect is performed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the change. Then, during a period from when the display mode of the first suggestive image changes to the predetermined display mode until the predetermined time elapses, a timer image indicating the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on the predetermined display unit. For this reason, in the normal effect period, first, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and when the suggestive effect is executed, the player is brought to the display mode of the first suggestive image in the suggestive effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the timer image showing the remaining time until the high expectation performance is executed when the display mode of the first suggestive image becomes a predetermined display mode. . As a result, it is possible to effectively raise the expectations of the players waiting for the execution (occurrence) of the high-expectation performance, and to improve the amusement of the game when the special performance period is not occurring (during the normal performance period). becomes possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a high expectation production that suggests that the possibility is high,
The suggestive effect can be executed prior to the execution of the high-expectation-level effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when the high-expectation effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is highly likely to be the specific display result, the suggestion effect is executed prior to the execution. It is possible. Therefore, the execution of the suggestive effect makes it possible for the player to have expectations for the subsequent execution (occurrence) of the high-expectation-level effect. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the suggestive effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above,
The performance executing means is capable of executing the high-expectation performance in the same manner when the special performance period is not occurring and when the special performance period is occurring. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the high-expectation-level effect can be executed in the same manner during the normal effect period and the special effect period. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the special effect period has occurred, it is possible to make the high-expectation effect the same aspect (the effect content). As a result, it is possible to standardize the high-expectation-level effects and make the effects easy for the players to understand.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above,
The performance executing means is capable of executing the high-expectation performance in different manners when the special performance period is not generated and when the special performance period is generated. is.

According to such a gaming machine, the high-expectation-level effect can be executed in different modes during the normal effect period and the special effect period. Therefore, it is possible to execute the high-expectation performance in a mode (performance content) suitable for each of the normal performance period and the special performance period. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the high-expectation performance and attract the player's interest in the difference.

According to the third embodiment of the invention described above, it is possible to improve the amusement of a game of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

(Reference Invention 4)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines are provided with production devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), speakers, etc., and various productions are executed according to the progress of a game. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect that is different from the normal effect that accompanies the progress of the game, every time a predetermined time is measured. By arranging a plurality of gaming machines equipped with such functions on an island facility in a gaming hall, a special effect by a plurality of gaming machines can be executed all at once at a predetermined cycle (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -180295).

However, there is still room for improvement in gaming machines having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The present reference invention 4 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to improve the convenience of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
In a game machine that uses a predetermined game medium to play a game,
input means for input by the player;
a time measuring means capable of measuring time;
and a production control means capable of controlling production,
The production control means is
A special effect can be executed based on the result of timing by the timing means,
generating a reception period for receiving input by the input means within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect;
It is characterized in that execution of the special effect can be stopped based on an input by the input means during the acceptance period.

According to such a gaming machine, a reception period during which an input by the input means is received occurs within a predetermined period of time before the executable special effect is started based on the timing result of the timing means. It is possible to stop the execution of the special effect based on the input by the input means. Therefore, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution of the special effect before starting the execution by inputting using the input means during the acceptance period. As a result, it is possible to add a function of canceling the special effect based on the result of timing, thereby improving the convenience.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 described above,
The production control means is
displaying a selection image prompting the player to select whether or not to execute the special effect on a predetermined selection image display unit during the acceptance period;
Execution of the special performance is stopped when the result of the input by the input means during the acceptance period is a selection result of non-execution of the special performance.

According to such a gaming machine, the selection image is displayed during the reception period before the start of the special performance, and the result of the input performed during the reception period is the result of selection to the effect that the special performance is not to be executed. In this case, execution of the special effect is stopped. Therefore, the player can look at the selection image displayed during the reception period and select whether or not to execute the special effect using the input means. As a result, the player can recognize the occurrence of the reception period through the display of the selection image, and the player can make a selection regarding execution or non-execution of the special effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or 4-2 described above,
The performance control means is characterized in that, when stopping execution of the special performance, the information regarding the special performance to be executed next time based on the result of the timing is displayed on a predetermined information display section. .

According to such a gaming machine, when the execution of the special effect is stopped based on the input by the input means, the information regarding the special effect to be executed based on the result of the next timing is displayed. Therefore, by seeing the display of the information about the next special performance, the player can know the next special performance that can be executed as well as the execution of the current special performance is cancelled. As a result, convenience can be improved by adding an information display (notification) function regarding the special presentation scheduled to be performed next time as well as the function of canceling the special presentation scheduled to be performed this time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3 described above,
a first image display means provided so that the display content can be visually recognized substantially in the center of the game area formed on the game board;
a second image display means provided so that the display content can be visually recognized at a location away from the center of the game area;
game state control means capable of changing the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The special effect is executed by displaying a predetermined special effect image,
The production control means is
displaying a predetermined effect image on the first image display means in the special game state;
when executing the special effect in the special game state, displaying the special effect image on the second image display means;
The special effect image is displayed on the first image display means when the special effect is executed when the game is not in the special game state.

According to such a game machine, the first image display means provided so that the display content can be visually recognized approximately in the center of the game area, and the display content can be visually recognized at a location away from the center of the game area. In the special game state, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the special game state is displayed on the first image display means (also referred to as main display means), and the special game When a special effect is executed in the state, a special effect image related to the special effect is displayed on the second image display means. On the other hand, when a special effect is executed when the game is not in the special game state, a special effect image relating to the special effect is displayed on the first image display means. Therefore, depending on whether the game state when the special effect is executed is the special game state or not, the display position of the special effect image becomes the first image display means or the second image. It can be used as a display means. This makes it possible to appropriately display the special effect image related to the special effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 described above,
A display size of the special effect image displayed on the second image display means is smaller than that of the special effect image displayed on the first image display means.

According to such a gaming machine, when the special effect image is displayed on the second image display means, the special effect image is displayed in a larger size than when the special effect image is displayed on the first image display means. assumed to be small. Therefore, when a special effect is executed during execution of a special game, the special effect image associated with the special effect is displayed in a small size on the second image display means. As a result, even if the special effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the special effect image can be displayed without disturbing the visibility of the image for the special game.

According to the present invention 4 described above, it is possible to improve the convenience of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

(Reference Invention 5)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, game machines are provided with production devices such as liquid crystal displays, movable accessories (gimmicks), speakers, etc., and various productions are executed according to the progress of a game. Some gaming machines of this type have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect that is different from the normal effect that accompanies the progress of the game, every time a predetermined time is measured. By arranging a plurality of gaming machines equipped with such functions on an island facility in a gaming hall, a special effect by a plurality of gaming machines can be executed all at once at a predetermined cycle (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -180295).

However, the function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals has already been widely known, and simply providing such a function is insufficient to improve the enjoyment of the game.

This reference invention 5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to improve the game amusement of a game machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Acquired information storage means capable of storing acquired information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole;
determination means for determining the acquired information;
identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information based on the result of the determination;
special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result;
a time measuring means capable of measuring time;
and a production execution means capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
a special production including a main production and a preceding production performed prior to the main production;
a specific suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result,
While executing the special effect based on the result of timing by the timing means,
Execution of the specific suggestive effect at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, based on the fact that acquired information is stored as the display result of the variable display as the specific display result. It is characterized by having

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information is variably displayed based on the determination result of the acquired information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the starting hole, and the display result of the variable display is the specific display result. Then, it becomes possible to execute a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player. Based on such games, a special effect and a specific suggestion effect can be executed. The special performance includes a main performance and a preceding performance performed prior to the main performance, and can be executed based on the result of timing by the clock means. Further, the specific suggestion effect is a effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the identification information will be the specific display result. Then, in executing the special effect, a specific suggestive effect may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect (before the start of the main effect). This is based on the fact that the acquired information that sets the display result as the specific display result is stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, when a specific suggestive effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, the specific suggestive effect stores the acquisition information that serves as the trigger for deriving the specific display result (execution trigger for the special game). It will function as a production that foretells that it is being done. As a result, when the special performance is executed based on the result of timing by the timing means, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the specific suggestion performance is executed before the start of the main performance related to the special performance, and the game is played. It is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 described above,
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state after the special game is provided,
The game state includes at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state,
The specific display results include a first specific display result in which the game state after the special game is the first game state, and a second specific display result in which the game state after the special game is the second game state. There is a result and
The effect execution means is based on the fact that the obtained information is stored as the second specific display result as the display result of the variable display at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect. It is characterized by executing a specific suggestive production.

According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the first specific display result, the game state after the special game based on this is the first game state, and the second specific display result. If so, the game state after the special game based on this becomes the second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state. Then, in executing the special effect, a specific suggestive effect may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect (before the start of the main effect). This is based on the fact that the acquired information that sets the display result as the second specific display result is stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, when the specific suggestive effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, the specific suggestive effect stores the acquired information that triggers the transition to the relatively advantageous second game state. It is a foretell of what is being done. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to whether or not the specific suggestive effect is executed when the special effect is executed based on the result of the timing by the timer means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2 described above,
The gist is that the effect executing means may execute the specific suggestive effect when the preceding effect ends.

According to such a gaming machine, when a special performance is executed based on the result of timing by the timer means, the specific suggestion performance can be executed when the preceding performance related to the special performance ends. Therefore, it is possible for the player to recognize the end timing of the preceding effect as the execution timing of the specific suggestive effect. As a result, it is possible to increase interest when the preceding performance related to the special performance ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3 described above,
The preceding effect is a countdown effect for displaying a countdown until the start of the main effect.

According to such a gaming machine, when a special effect is executed based on the result of timing by the timer means, a countdown effect for displaying a countdown until the start of the main effect related to the special effect is executed as a preceding effect. be done. For this reason, the countdown effect (countdown display) executed prior to the main effect indicates the remaining period until the main effect starts (in other words, until the preceding effect ends), and the period specified When the suggestive effect has not yet been executed, it indicates the remaining period until the period during which the specific suggestive effect can be executed ends. Further, when the specific suggestive performance is executed when the preceding performance is finished, the remaining period until the specific suggestive performance is executed is indicated. This makes it possible to increase interest in the period from the start of the special effect to the start of the main effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4 described above,
Provided with input means for the player to make an input,
The performance executing means is capable of stopping the execution of the special performance based on an input by the input means within a predetermined time before starting the special performance.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to stop the execution of the special effect based on the input by the input means within the predetermined time before the start of the special effect. Therefore, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution of the special performance by performing an input using the input means. Execution of the specific suggestion effect based on the fact that the acquired information is stored as the specific display result is also stopped. As a result, it is possible to set (select) the execution mode of the effect according to the player's preference.

According to the fifth aspect of the invention described above, it is possible to improve the amusement of a game machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

Any two or more inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 5 described above may be combined.

1 pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 3A left game area (first area), 3B right game area (second area), 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 8 production pattern, 20 first start 21 2nd starting opening 26 3rd starting opening 28 gate 30 first big winning opening 35 second big winning opening 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section) 41b second Special symbol display device (second special symbol display unit), 71 second image display device, 71a display screen, 72 third image display device, 72a display screen, 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board ( sub control unit), 92 RTC (clock means), 100 image control board (image control unit).

Claims (1)

identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be awarded to a player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming a specific display result;
a special effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined special effect in a predetermined cycle;
a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result;
input means for input by the player;
a reception period generation means for generating a reception period for receiving input by the input means before starting execution of the special effect,
It is possible to select execution or non-execution of the special effect based on the input by the input means during the reception period,
As the suggestive effect, a specific suggestive effect that can be executed during the execution period of the special effect is provided,
When non-execution of the special effect is selected based on the input by the input means during the reception period, the execution of the special effect and the specific suggestion effect is stopped , and the special effect to be executed in the next cycle A gaming machine characterized in that information is displayed on a predetermined display section .

Images